Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 364

251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 1

d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

R-Class
Operator’s Manual
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 2
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Symbols
Trademarks®:
RAdBlue® is a registered trademark of the
German Association of the Automotive
Industry (VDA).
RBabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
RESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered
trademarks of Daimler.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of
Prince, a Johnson Controls Company.
RSIRIUS and related marks are trademarks
of SIRIUS XM Radio Inc.
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
G Warning!
Warning notices draw your attention to
hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.

! Highlights hazards that may result in


damage to your vehicle.

i Helpful hints or further information you


may find useful.
X This symbol points to instructions
for you to follow.
X A number of these symbols
appearing in succession indicates
a multiple-step procedure.
Y page This symbol tells you where to look
for further information on a topic.
YY This continuation symbol marks a
warning or procedure which is
continued on the next page.
Display Text in displays, such as the control
system, are printed in the type
shown here.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 1
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Our company and staff congratulate you on


the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz.
Your selection of our product is a
demonstration of your trust in our company
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire
to own an automobile that will be as easy as
possible to operate and will provide years of
service.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of
many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To
help assure your driving pleasure, and also
the safety of you and your passengers, we ask
you to make a small investment of time:
RPlease read this manual carefully, then
return it to your vehicle where it will be
handy for your reference.
RPlease follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are
designed to acquaint you with the
operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
RPlease pay attention to the warnings and
cautions contained in this manual. They are
designed to help improve the safety of the
vehicle operator and occupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles of
safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A Daimler Company

2515843082 É2515843082_ËÍ
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 2
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 3
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Contents 3

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 25

Introduction ......................................... 20 Safety and security ............................. 35

Controls in detail ................................. 69

Operation ........................................... 219

Practical hints ................................... 269

Technical data ................................... 343


251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 4
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

4 Index

1, 2, 3 ... Front passenger front air bag off


indicator lamp (USA only) ........ 42, 307
115V AC Socket ................................. 206 Messages in the multifunction
3-zone automatic climate control display ........................................... 277
see Climate control system OCS (Occupant Classification
4-ETS (Electronic Traction System) ... 65 System ............................................. 42
4MATIC Safety guidelines ............................. 39
see All-wheel drive (4MATIC) Side impact ...................................... 40
Window curtain ................................ 41
A Air conditioning refrigerant and
ABS (Antilock Brake System) ............. 63 lubricant ............................................. 352
Indicator lamp ................................ 300 Air distribution .......................... 168, 177
Messages in the multifunction Air filter .............................................. 294
display ................................... 275, 286 AIRMATIC
Accessory weight .............................. 248 ADS (Adaptive Damping System) ... 153
Accidents ........................................... 113 Introduction ................................... 153
Air bags ........................................... 37 Messages in the multifunction
Distance warning function ............. 152 display ........................................... 287
Emergency calls (Tele Aid) ............. 209 Vehicle level control ...................... 154
NECK-PRO active front head AIRMATIC/Compass menu ............... 129
restraints ........................................ 53 Air pressure
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps see Tire inflation pressure
Messages in the multifunction Air pressure (tires) ............................ 249
display ........................................... 295 Air pump (electric) ............................ 328
see Headlamps Air recirculation mode .............. 169, 179
Adaptive Damping System Air volume ................................. 168, 178
see ADS Alarm system
AdBlue® ...................................... 331, 354 see Anti-theft systems
Capacity, AdBlue® tank ................. 351 Alignment bolt (vehicle tool
Refilling ......................................... 332 kit) .............................................. 270, 327
Additives All-wheel drive (4MATIC) .................. 156
Engine oil ....................................... 352 Alternator
Gasoline ......................................... 354 Messages in the multifunction
Address change ................................... 22 display ................................... 282, 292
ADS (Adaptive Damping System) ..... 153 Alternator (Technical data)
Advanced Tire Pressure see Vehicle specification
Monitoring System (Advanced Anticorrosion/antifreeze .................. 356
TPMS) ................................................. 232 Antilock Brake System
Messages in the multifunction see ABS
display ................................... 283, 298 Anti-theft systems ............................... 67
Air bags ................................................ 37 Anti-theft alarm system ................... 67
Emergency call upon deployment . . 209 Immobilizer ...................................... 67
Front, driver and passenger ............. 40 Aquaplaning
Front passenger front air bag off see Hydroplaning
indicator lamp (Canada Armrest, front
only) ........................................ 45, 307 Storage compartment .................... 198
Telephone tray ............................... 198
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 5
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Index 5

Armrest, rear Battery, Vehicle ................................. 333


Storage compartment .................... 199 Charging ........................................ 335
Ashtrays ............................................. 204 Jump starting ................................. 336
Aspect ratio (tires) ............................ 249 Messages in the multifunction
Audio/DVD menu .............................. 128 display ................................... 282, 292
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ........ 94 Bead (tire) .......................................... 249
Automatic central locking .......... 74, 137 Beverage holders
Automatic headlamp mode ................ 98 see Cup holders
Automatic interior lighting control .. 102 Bleeding the fuel system (diesel
Automatic locking when driving ...... 137 engine) ............................................... 331
Automatic shift program .................. 120 BlueTEC
Automatic transmission ................... 115 AdBlue® tank ................................. 331
Automatic shift program ................ 120 AdBlue® tank capacity ................... 351
Emergency operation (limp-home Brake fluid
mode) ............................................ 121 Checking level ............................... 227
Gear range indicator ...................... 120 Messages in the multifunction
Gear ranges ................................... 119 display ........................................... 286
Gear selector lever ........................ 116 Brake lamps
Hill-start assist system .................. 153 Cleaning lenses ............................. 265
Kickdown ....................................... 119 Brake pads
One-touch gearshifting .................. 120 Messages in the multifunction
Program mode indicator ................ 120 display ........................................... 285
Program mode selector switch Brakes ................................................ 253
(automatic shift program) .............. 120 Parking brake ........................ 114, 255
Shifting procedure ......................... 118 Warning lamp ................................. 301
Steering wheel gearshift control .... 121 Break-in period .................................. 220
Towing a trailer .............................. 119 Bug cover (Radiator) ......................... 224
Transmission position indicator ..... 118 Bulbs
Transmission positions .................. 118 see Replacing bulbs
AUX socket ........................................ 198
Axle oils .............................................. 351 C

B CAC (Customer Assistance Center) ... 23


California retail buyers and
BabySmart™ lessees, important notice for ............. 21
Air bag deactivation system ............. 45 Calls (phone) ...................................... 140
Self-test ........................................... 47 Can holders
Backrest see Cup holders
see Seats Capacities and recommended
Backup lamps fuel/lubricants .................................. 350
Messages in the multifunction Cargo compartment
display ........................................... 295 Cargo net ....................................... 196
Bar (air pressure unit) ....................... 249 Cargo volume, expanding .............. 189
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 64 Cover blind .................................... 194
Batteries, SmartKey Fuse box ........................................ 342
Checking condition .......................... 73 Hooks ............................................ 189
Replacing ....................................... 310 Tie-down rings ............................... 188
Cargo compartment cover blind ...... 194
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 6
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

6 Index

Cargo net ........................................... 196 Clock ............................................ 28, 133


Cargo tie-down rings ......................... 188 Cockpit ................................................. 27
Carpets, cleaning .............................. 267 Cold tire inflation pressure .............. 249
Central locking Collapsible tire (spare wheel) .......... 350
Automatic ................................ 74, 137 Collapsible wheel chock ................... 272
KEYLESS-GO .................................... 71 COMAND system
Locking/unlocking from inside ........ 74 see separate COMAND system
SmartKey ......................................... 70 operating instructions
Central locking/unlocking switch ..... 74 Combination switch .......................... 100
Certification label .............................. 344 Comfort submenu
Children in the vehicle Easy-entry/exit feature .................. 137
Air bags ........................................... 37 Fold-in function for exterior rear
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation view mirrors ................................... 138
system ............................................. 45 Seat belt adjustment feature ......... 138
Child safety locks (rear doors) ......... 61 Compass
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type .... 60 Calling up ....................................... 216
Indicator lamp, front passenger Control system .................................. 123
front air bag off (Canada only) ......... 45 Multifunction display ..................... 125
Indicator lamp, front passenger Multifunction steering wheel ......... 123
front air bag off (USA only) .............. 42 Resetting to factory settings .......... 131
Infant and child restraint systems .... 55 Control system menus ...................... 126
OCS (Occupant Classification AIRMATIC/Compass ...................... 129
System) ........................................... 42 Audio/DVD .................................... 128
Override switch ................................ 62 Distronic ........................................ 129
Safety notes ..................................... 55 Navigation ..................................... 129
Tether anchorage points .................. 57 Settings ......................................... 130
Top tether ........................................ 57 Standard display ............................ 126
Child safety Telephone ...................................... 140
see Children in the vehicle Trip computer ................................ 139
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type Vehicle status message memory ... 130
see Children in the vehicle Control system submenus
Chrome-plated exhaust tip, Comfort ......................................... 137
cleaning .............................................. 268 Instrument cluster ......................... 132
Cigarette lighter ................................ 205 Lighting .......................................... 134
Climate control system .................... 162 Time/Date ..................................... 133
3-zone automatic climate control . . 170 Vehicle ........................................... 137
Air conditioning ..................... 167, 175 Coolant
Air conditioning refrigerant ............ 352 Anticorrosion/antifreeze ............... 356
Air distribution ....................... 168, 177 Capacities ...................................... 351
Air recirculation mode ........... 169, 179 Checking level ............................... 225
Air volume ............................. 168, 178 Messages in the multifunction
Automatic mode .................... 167, 176 display ........................................... 290
Climate control .............................. 164 Corner-illuminating front fog
Deactivating system .............. 166, 175 lamps .................................................. 101
Front defroster ...................... 168, 178 Cruise control .................................... 142
Residual heat and Activating ....................................... 143
ventilation .............................. 170, 180 Canceling ....................................... 143
Temperature .......................... 168, 176
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 7
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Index 7

Changing the set speed ................. 144 Messages in the multifunction


Last stored speed .......................... 144 display ........................................... 274
Lever .............................................. 143 Multifunction display ..................... 125
Messages in the mutlifunction Outside temperature ............. 127, 133
display ........................................... 280 Symbol messages .......................... 285
Resume function ............................ 144 Text messages ............................... 275
Setting current speed .................... 143 Trip computer ................................ 139
Cup holders ........................................ 201 Vehicle status message memory ... 130
Curb weight ....................................... 249 Vehicle system settings ................. 130
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 23 Distronic ............................................ 145
Customer Relations Department ....... 23 Cleaning system sensor cover ....... 265
Control system .............................. 129
D Distance warning function ............. 152
Distance warning
Dashboard lamp ...................................... 147, 304
see Instrument cluster Driving with .................................... 151
Data recording ..................................... 23 Menu ............................................. 147
Date, Setting ...................................... 134 Messages in the multifunction
Daytime running lamp mode .............. 99 display ........................................... 280
Switching on or off ......................... 134 Resume function ............................ 150
Deep water Sensor cover .................................. 265
see Standing water Speed settings ............................... 149
Defroster Door control panel .............................. 33
Rear window .................................. 180 Door handles ........................................ 33
Windshield ............................. 168, 178 Doors
Delayed shut-off Child safety locks ............................ 61
Exterior lamps ................................ 135 Locking/unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) ... 71
Interior lighting .............................. 136 Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 70
Department of Transportation Messages in the multifunction
see DOT display ........................................... 289
Diesel engine Opening from inside ......................... 74
Preglow indicator lamp .................... 29 Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ....... 212
Diesel fuel Unlocking (Mechanical key) ........... 308
see Fuel DOT (Department of
Difficulties Transportation) .................................. 249
While driving .................................. 113 Drinking and driving ......................... 253
With starting .................................. 111 Driving
Digital clock Abroad ........................................... 259
see Clock Hydroplaning ................................. 255
Digital speedometer ......................... 127 Instructions ........................... 110, 253
Dimensions (vehicle) In winter ........................................ 252
see Vehicle specification Problems ....................................... 113
Direction of rotation (tires) .............. 240 Safety systems ................................ 63
Displays Systems ......................................... 142
Digital speedometer ...................... 127 Through standing water ................. 256
Distronic ........................................ 146 With Distronic ................................ 151
Maintenance service indicator ....... 261 Driving and parking
Safety notes .................................. 110
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 8
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

8 Index

Driving off .................................. 112, 255 Emission control ............................... 260


Driving safety systems ....................... 63 Information label ............................ 345
4-ETS ............................................... 65 System warranties ........................... 20
ABS .................................................. 63 Engine
BAS .................................................. 64 Break-in recommendations ............ 220
EBP .................................................. 64 Cleaning ......................................... 264
ESP® ................................................ 65 Compartment ................................ 222
Driving systems Malfunction indicator
AIRMATIC ...................................... 153 lamp ........................................ 29, 305
All-wheel drive (4MATIC) ................ 156 Messages in the multifunction
Cruise control ................................ 142 display ........................................... 290
Distronic ........................................ 145 Number .......................................... 345
Hill-start assist system .................. 153 Starting .......................................... 110
Parktronic system .......................... 156 Turning off ..................................... 114
Rear view camera .......................... 159 Engine (Technical data)
Driving tips, automatic see Vehicle specification
transmission ...................................... 119 Engine compartment
Radiator ......................................... 224
E Engine coolant
see Coolant
Easy-entry/exit feature .............. 92, 137 Engine oil
EBP (Electronic Brake Adding ........................................... 225
Proportioning) ...................................... 64 Additives ........................................ 352
Electrical system Checking level ............................... 224
Improper work on or Consumption ................................. 224
modifications ................................... 22 Messages in the multifunction
Power outlets ................................. 206 display ........................................... 293
Electrical system (Technical data) Oil dipstick ..................................... 224
see Vehicle specification Recommended engine oils and oil
Electronic Stability Program filter ............................................... 352
see ESP® ESP® (Electronic Stability
Electronic Traction System Program) .............................................. 65
see 4-ETS 4-ETS ............................................... 65
Emergency, in case of Messages in the multifunction
First aid kit ..................................... 270 display ................................... 275, 286
Flat tire .......................................... 319 Trailer stabilization ........................... 66
Hazard warning flasher .................. 101 Warning lamp ................................. 303
Roadside Assistance ................ 21, 210 ETD (Emergency Tensioning
Towing the vehicle ......................... 338 Device) ................................................. 52
Emergency calls Safety guidelines ............................. 39
Tele Aid .......................................... 209 Express operation
Emergency engine shutdown ........... 342 Panorama roof ............................... 184
Emergency operations Power windows .............................. 106
Limp-home mode ........................... 121 Tilt/sliding sunroof ........................ 181
Remote door unlock ...................... 212 Exterior lamp switch ........................... 97
Emergency Tensioning Device Exterior rear view mirrors .................. 94
see ETD Fold-in function .............................. 138
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 9
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Index 9

Parking position ............................... 95 Capacity, fuel tank ......................... 351


Power folding ................................... 95 Diesel fuel ............................. 351, 353
Exterior view of vehicle ...................... 26 Drive sensibly–safe fuel ................. 253
Fuel consumption statistics ........... 139
F Fuel filler flap and cap ................... 221
Fuel tank reserve warning
Fastening the seat belts ..................... 49
lamp ........................................ 29, 305
First aid kit ......................................... 270 Premium unleaded gasoline ... 351, 353
Flat tire ............................................... 319 Refueling ........................................ 220
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 329 Requirements ................................ 353
Mounting the spare wheel ............. 324 Fuel filler flap ..................................... 221
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 320 Opening manually .......................... 309
Spare wheel ........................... 319, 350 Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
TIREFIT (tire repair kit) ................... 320 Capacities ...................................... 350
Floormats ........................................... 217 Fuel system, bleeding (diesel
Fluids engine) ............................................... 331
AdBlue® ......................................... 351 Fuel tank
Automatic transmission fluid ......... 350 Capacity ........................................ 351
Brake fluid ..................................... 351 Fuel filler flap and cap ................... 221
Capacities ...................................... 350 Refueling ........................................ 220
Engine coolant ............................... 351 Fuses .................................................. 340
Engine oil ....................................... 350
Power steering fluid ....................... 351
G
Washer and headlamp cleaning
system ........................................... 351 Garage door opener .................... 32, 213
Fog lamps ............................................. 99 Gasoline
Messages in the multifunction see Fuel
display ................................... 295, 296 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) ... 249
Fold-in function for exterior rear Gear range ......................................... 119
view mirrors ...................................... 138 Indicator ........................................ 120
Four-wheel drive Limiting .......................................... 121
see All-wheel drive (4MATIC) Shifting into optimal ...................... 121
Front air bags Gear selector lever ............................ 116
see Air bags Cleaning ......................................... 267
Front axle oil ...................................... 351 Gearshift pattern ........................... 116
Front lamps Shifting procedure ......................... 118
see Headlamps Transmission position indicator ..... 118
Front passenger front air bag ............ 40 Transmission positions .................. 118
Messages in the multifunction Generator
display ........................................... 277 see Alternator
Front passenger front air bag off Global locking/unlocking
indicator lamp (Canada only) ..... 45, 307 see Key, SmartKey
Front passenger front air bag off Glove box ........................................... 198
indicator lamp (USA only) .......... 42, 307 Gross Axle Weight Rating
Front seat head restraints see GAWR
see Head restraints Gross Trailer Weight
Fuel ............................................. 220, 353 see GTW
Additives ........................................ 354
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 10
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

10 Index

Gross Vehicle Weight Hood ................................................... 222


see GVW Messages in the multifunction
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating display ........................................... 288
see GVWR Hooks ................................................. 189
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) .............. 249 Horn ...................................................... 27
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) ............ 249 HVAC
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight see Climate control system
Rating) ................................................ 249 Hydroplaning ..................................... 255

H I
Halogen headlamps Identification labels .......................... 344
see Headlamps Identification number, vehicle
Hard plastic trim items, cleaning .... 267 (VIN) ................................................... 345
Hazard warning flasher .................... 101 Ignition ................................... 79, 80, 111
Headlamp cleaning system .............. 101 Immobilizer .......................................... 67
Headlamps Indicator lamps
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps ............. 97 see Lamps, indicator and warning
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 98 Infant and child restraint systems
Bi-Xenon .................................. 97, 313 see Children in the vehicle
Cleaning lenses ............................. 265 Inflation pressure
Cleaning system ............................ 101 see Tires, Inflation pressure
Daytime running lamp mode ............ 99 Infrared reflecting windshield ......... 217
Delayed shut-off ............................ 135 Inside door handle .............................. 74
Halogen ......................................... 313 Instrument cluster ...................... 28, 122
High-beam flasher ......................... 101 Illumination .................................... 123
High-beam headlamps ................... 100 Lamps ............................................ 299
Low-beam headlamps ...................... 98 Multifunction display ..................... 125
Replacing bulbs ............................. 312 Instrument lighting
Switch .............................................. 97 see Instrument cluster, Illumination
Headliner, cleaning and care of ....... 267 Instrument panel
Head restraints .................................... 81 see Instrument cluster
Adjustment ................................ 81, 83 Instruments and controls
NECK-PRO active front head see Cockpit
restraints ......................................... 53 Interior lighting
NECK-PRO active front head Delayed shut-off ............................ 136
restraints, resetting ....................... 310 Emergency lighting ........................ 103
Heated steering wheel ........................ 93 Front .............................................. 102
Height adjustment Front reading lamps ....................... 102
Seat belt outlet ................................ 50 Rear ............................................... 103
Seats ............................................... 81 Rear reading lamps ........................ 103
Vehicle level control ...................... 154 Interior rear view mirror ..................... 94
High-beam flasher ............................. 101 Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ....... 94
High-beam headlamps .............. 100, 313 Interior storage spaces
Indicator lamp .................................. 29 see Storage compartments
Hill-start assist system ..................... 153 Intermittent wiping
Hinged quarter windows .................. 107 Rain sensor .................................... 104
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 11
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Index 11

J Tire and Loading Information


placard ........................................... 236
Jack ..................................................... 272 Tire inflation pressure .................... 230
Jump starting ..................................... 336 Lamps, exterior
Exterior lamp switch ........................ 97
K Front .............................................. 313
Key, Mechanical Messages in the multifunction
Loss of ............................................. 73 display ........................................... 295
Unlocking/locking manually .......... 308 Rear ............................................... 313
Key, SmartKey Switching on/off .............................. 97
Battery check lamp .......................... 73 Lamps, indicator and warning
Checking batteries ........................... 73 ABS .......................................... 28, 300
Factory setting ........................... 71, 72 Brakes ..................................... 28, 301
Global locking (KEYLESS- Distance warning
GO) .................................................. 73 lamp ........................ 28, 147, 152, 304
Global locking (SmartKey) ................ 71 Engine malfunction .................. 29, 305
Global unlocking (KEYLESS- ESP® ........................................ 28, 303
GO) ............................................ 72, 73 Fog lamps ........................................ 99
Global unlocking Front passenger front air bag off
(SmartKey) ....................................... 71 (Canada only) .......................... 45, 307
Important notes on KEYLESS-GO ..... 72 Front passenger front air bag off
Locking/unlocking ........................... 70 (USA only) ................................ 42, 307
Loss of ............................................. 73 Fuel tank reserve ..................... 29, 305
Messages in the multifunction High-beam headlamps ............. 29, 100
display ........................................... 289 Instrument cluster ................... 28, 299
Opening and closing the power Low-beam headlamps ................ 29, 98
tilt/sliding sunroof or the Low tire pressure/TPMS
panorama roof ............................... 108 malfunction telltale .................. 28, 306
Opening and closing the windows . 108 Seat belt telltale ................ 29, 51, 302
Remote control ................................ 70 SRS .................................... 29, 36, 303
Replacing batteries ........................ 310 Turn signals ..................................... 28
Restoring to factory setting ....... 71, 73 Language, selecting .......................... 133
Selective setting ........................ 71, 73 LATCH-type child seat anchors
Starter switch positions ................... 79 see Children in the vehicle
KEYLESS-GO License plate lamps
Starter switch positions ................... 80 Messages in the multifunction
Kickdown ........................................... 119 display ........................................... 296
Kilopascal (air pressure unit) ........... 249 Replacing bulbs ............................. 314
Light alloy wheels, cleaning ............. 267
L Lighter
see Cigarette lighter
Labels Lighting ................................................ 97
Certification ................................... 344 Daytime running lamp mode ............ 99
Emission control information ......... 345 Exterior ............................................ 97
Interior ........................................... 102
Limp-home mode .............................. 121
Load index (tires) ...................... 245, 249
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 12
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

12 Index

Loading MOExtended system ......................... 330


see Vehicle loading MOExtended tires ..................... 330, 347
Locator lighting ................................. 135 MON (Motor Octane Number) .......... 353
Lock button Motor Octane Number
Outside door handle (KEYLESS- see MON
GO) .................................................. 73 Multicontour seat ................................ 90
Locking the vehicle Multifunction display ........................ 125
KEYLESS-GO .................................... 71 Symbol messages .......................... 285
Manually ........................................ 309 Text messages ............................... 275
SmartKey ......................................... 70 Vehicle status messages ............... 274
Loss of Multifunction display messages
Key .................................................. 73 ABS ....................................... 275, 286
Service and Warranty Information Active headlamps .......................... 295
booklet .......................................... 344 Advanced TPMS ..................... 283, 298
Low-beam headlamps ......................... 98 Air bags ......................................... 277
Exterior lamp switch ........................ 97 Air filter .......................................... 294
Switching on .................................... 98 AIRMATIC ...................................... 287
Lubricants .......................................... 350 Alternator .............................. 282, 292
Lumbar support ................................... 86 Automatic
transmission .................................. 282
M Battery ................................... 282, 292
Brake fluid ..................................... 286
Maintenance ........................................ 21
Brake pads ..................................... 285
Maintenance System Coolant .......................................... 290
Service indicator display ................ 262 Corner-illuminating front fog
Service indicator message ............. 261 lamps ............................................. 297
Service term exceeded .................. 261 Cruise control ................................ 280
Manual headlamp mode (Low- Distronic ........................................ 280
beam headlamps) ................................ 98 Doors ............................................. 289
Maximum engine speed EBP ................................................ 286
see Vehicle specification Engine oil ....................................... 293
Maximum loaded vehicle weight ..... 250
ESP® ...................................... 275, 286
Maximum load rating (tires) ............. 249
Fog lamps .............................. 295, 296
Maximum permissible tire
Front passenger front air bag ........ 277
inflation pressure .............................. 250
Gas cap .......................................... 294
Mechanical key .................................. 308 High-beam lamps ........................... 296
Media interface ................................. 198 Hood .............................................. 288
Memory function ................................. 96 License plate lamps ....................... 296
Menus Light sensor ................................... 296
see Control system menus Low-beam lamps ............................ 296
Mirrors .................................................. 93 Parking brake ................................ 286
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ....... 94 Parking lamps ................................ 296
Exterior rear view mirror parking PRE-SAFE® .................................... 276
position ............................................ 95 Reserve fuel ................................... 293
Exterior rear view mirrors ................ 94 Reverse lamp ................................. 295
Interior rear view mirror ................... 94 Side marker lamps ......................... 295
Memory function .............................. 96 SmartKey ....................................... 289
Vanity mirror .................................. 203
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 13
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Index 13

SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO .......... 289 Child seat anchors – LATCH-type .... 60
SRS ................................................ 287 Fastening the seat belts ................... 49
Tailgate .......................................... 288 Front passenger front air bag off
Tail lamps ...................................... 297 indicator lamp (Canada
Tele Aid .......................................... 287 only) ........................................ 45, 307
Tire inflation pressure ............ 283, 298 Front passenger front air bag off
Tire pressure monitor .................... 283 indicator lamp (USA only) ........ 42, 307
Tires ...................................... 283, 298 Infant and child restraint systems .... 55
Trailer brake lamps ........................ 297 Introduction ..................................... 36
Trailer tail lamps ............................ 297 OCS (Occupant Classification
Trailer turn signal lamps ................ 297 System) ........................................... 42
Turn signals ................................... 298 PRE-SAFE® ....................................... 52
Washer fluid ................................... 290 Seat belts .................................. 39, 47
Multifunction steering wheel OCS (Occupant Classification
Adjustment ...................................... 91 System) ................................................ 42
Buttons .......................................... 123 Self-test ........................................... 45
Cleaning ......................................... 267 Odometer ........................................... 125
Easy-entry/exit feature ........... 92, 137 Oil, oil level
Gearshift control ............................ 121 see Engine oil
Heating ............................................ 93 On-board computer
Memory function .............................. 96 see Control system
Overview .......................................... 30 One-touch gearshifting ..................... 120
Operating safety .................................. 22
N Ornamental moldings, cleaning ....... 265
Navigation menu ............................... 129 Outside temperature
Navigation system see Displays
see Separate operating instructions Overhead control panel ...................... 32
NECK-PRO active front head
restraints ............................................. 53 P
Resetting ....................................... 310 Paintwork, cleaning .......................... 264
Nets, parcel ....................................... 188 Paintwork code ................................. 345
Night security illumination .............. 135 Panic alarm .......................................... 62
Normal occupant weight .................. 250 Panorama roof with power tilt/
Number, vehicle identification sliding panel ...................................... 184
(VIN) ................................................... 345 Cleaning ......................................... 266
Operation ....................................... 184
O Roller sunblinds ............................. 184
Occupant Classification System Synchronizing ................................ 186
see OCS (Occupant Classification Parcel nets ......................................... 188
System) Parking ............................................... 114
Occupant distribution ....................... 250 Parktronic system .......................... 156
Occupant safety Parking brake ............................ 114, 255
Air bags ........................................... 37 Messages in the multifunction
BabySmart™ .................................... 45 display ........................................... 286
Children and air bags ....................... 37 Parking position
Children in the vehicle ..................... 55 Exterior rear view mirrors ................ 95
Transmission position .................... 118
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 14
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

14 Index

Parktronic system PRE-SAFE® ............................................ 52


Cleaning system sensors ............... 265 Messages in the multifunction
Malfunction .................................... 159 display ........................................... 276
Minimum distance ......................... 158 Problems
Sensor range ................................. 157 While driving .................................. 113
Switching on/off ........................... 159 With vehicle ..................................... 23
System sensors ............................. 157 Product information ............................ 20
Warning indicators ................... 27, 158 Production options weight ............... 250
Parts service ...................................... 344 Program mode selector switch
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp Automatic shift program ................ 120
(Canada only) Proximity key
see Front passenger front air bag see Key, SmartKey
off indicator lamp (Canada only) PSI (air pressure unit) ....................... 250
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
(USA only) R
see Front passenger front air bag
off indicator lamp (USA only) Radiator ..................................... 224, 251
Passenger safety Radio
see Occupant safety Selecting stations .......................... 128
Pedals ................................................. 253 Radio transmitters ............................ 260
Phone Rain sensor
see Telephone see Intermittent wiping
Plastic parts, cleaning ...................... 267 Rear axle oil ....................................... 351
Power assistance .............................. 253 Rear center console .......................... 200
Power outlets .................................... 206 Rear doors
Power seats Child safety locks ............................ 61
see Seats Rear door window
Power tailgate Override switch ................................ 62
Closing ............................................. 76 Rear fog lamp
Messages in the multifunction see Fog lamps
display ........................................... 288 Rear lamps
Opening ........................................... 76 see Tail lamps
Power tilt/sliding sunroof Rear seat ashtray
Operation ....................................... 181 see Ashtrays
Synchronizing ................................ 183 Rear seats
Power washer .................................... 263 see Seats
Power windows ................................. 106 Rear view camera .............................. 159
Cleaning ......................................... 266 Cleaning the camera lens .............. 266
Door windows ................................ 107 Rear window defroster ..................... 180
Hinged quarter windows ................ 107 Rear window wiper/washer ............. 105
Operation ....................................... 106 Recommended tire inflation
Rear door window, override pressure ..................................... 228, 250
switch .............................................. 62 Refilling
Synchronizing ................................ 107 AdBlue® ......................................... 332
Practical hints ................................... 270 Refrigerant, air conditioning ............ 352
Preglow indicator lamp .............. 29, 111 Refueling ............................................ 220
Regular checks .................................. 222
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 15
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Index 15

Reminder, Seat belt Seats ..................................................... 81


see Seat belts, Telltale Adjustment ...................................... 81
Remote control Easy-entry/exit feature .................... 92
see Key, SmartKey Folding (expanding cargo volume) . 189
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ......... 212 Heating ............................................ 91
Replacing bulbs ................................. 312 Memory function .............................. 96
Reporting safety defects .................... 23 Multicontour seat ............................ 90
Research Octane Number Rear seats ........................................ 86
see RON Ventilation ....................................... 90
Reserve fuel Securing cargo
Messages in the multifunction Cargo tie-down rings ...................... 188
display ........................................... 293 Selective setting
Warning lamp ................................... 29 see Key, SmartKey
Reset button ................................ 28, 122 Selector lever
Reset tool (NECK-PRO active front see Gear selector lever
head restraints) ................................. 310 Self-test
Restraint systems BabySmart™ .................................... 47
see Occupant safety OCS (Occupant Classification
Rims ........................................... 250, 347 System) ........................................... 45
Roadside Assistance ................... 21, 210 Tele Aid .......................................... 208
Roller sunblinds ................................. 184 Service
RON (Research Octane Number) ..... 353 see Maintenance
Roof rack ............................................ 187 Service, parts .................................... 344
Rubber parts, cleaning ...................... 267 Service and warranty information ..... 20
Run-flat tires Service intervals
see MOExtended tires see Maintenance System, Service
indicator message
S Service life (tires) .............................. 241
Settings
Safety Factory setting (KEYLESS-GO) ......... 72
Driving safety systems ..................... 63 Factory setting (SmartKey) .............. 71
Occupant safety ............................... 36 Memory function .............................. 96
Reporting defects ............................ 23 Menu ............................................. 130
Safety belts Selective setting (KEYLESS-GO) ....... 73
see Seat belts Selective setting (SmartKey) ............ 71
Seat belt force limiter ......................... 52 Side impact air bags ........................... 40
Seat belts ............................................. 47 Side marker lamps
Adjustment function ........................ 51 Cleaning lenses ............................. 265
Children in the vehicle ..................... 55 Messages in the multifunction
Cleaning ......................................... 267 display ........................................... 295
Fastening ......................................... 49 Sidewall (tires) .................................. 250
Height adjustment ........................... 50 Side windows
Proper use of ................................... 48 see Power windows
Safety guidelines ............................. 39 SmartKey
Safety notes ..................................... 47 see Key, SmartKey
Telltale ..................................... 29, 302 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
Seat heating ......................................... 91 see Key, SmartKey
Seating capacity ................................ 237
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 16
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

16 Index

Snow chains ...................................... 252 Opening ........................................... 75


Snow tires Power tailgate .................................. 76
see Winter tires Tail lamps ........................................... 313
Spare wheel ....................................... 347 Cleaning lenses ............................. 265
Mounting ....................................... 324 Messages in the multifunction
Storage location ............................ 272 display ........................................... 297
Speedometer ............................... 28, 146 Tar stains ........................................... 263
Speed settings Technical data
Cruise control ................................ 143 Air conditioning refrigerant ............ 352
Distronic ........................................ 149 Brake fluid ..................................... 352
Resume function ................... 144, 150 Capacities fuels, coolants,
SRS lubricants etc. ................................ 350
Indicator lamp ................... 29, 36, 303 Coolant .......................................... 355
Messages in the multifunction Engine oil additives ........................ 352
display ........................................... 287 Engine oils ..................................... 352
Standing water, driving through ...... 256 Fuel requirements .......................... 353
Starter switch positions Gasoline additives .......................... 354
KEYLESS-GO .................................... 80 Identification labels ....................... 344
SmartKey ......................................... 79 Premium unleaded gasoline ........... 353
Starting difficulties (engine) ............ 111 Rims and tires ................................ 347
Starting the engine ........................... 110 Spare wheel ................................... 350
Steering column Vehicle specification R 350 ........... 346
see Multifunction steering wheel, Vehicle specification
Adjustment R 350 BlueTEC ............................... 346
Steering wheel Washer and headlamp cleaning
see Multifunction steering wheel system ................................... 351, 357
Steering wheel gearshift control ..... 121 Technical data (dimensions)
Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services . . . 212 see Vehicle specification
Storage compartments ..................... 197 Technical data (electrical system)
Storing tires ....................................... 242 see Vehicle specification
Stranded vehicle ............................... 340 Technical data (engine)
Sunroof see Vehicle specification
see Power tilt/sliding sunroof Technical data (weights)
Sunshade see Vehicle specification
Rear door window .......................... 204 Tele Aid ............................................... 207
Sun visors .......................................... 203 Emergency calls ............................. 209
Suspension tuning Information button ......................... 210
see AIRMATIC Initiating an emergency call
manually ........................................ 209
T Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 287
Tachometer .................................. 29, 123 Remote door unlock ...................... 212
Overspeed range ........................... 123 Roadside Assistance button .......... 210
Tailgate Search & Send ............................... 212
Closing ............................................. 75 SOS button .................................... 209
Messages in the multifunction Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services .. 212
display ........................................... 288 System self-test ............................. 208
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 17
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Index 17

Telephone ............................................. 30 Information placard ....................... 236


Answering/ending a call ................ 141 Inspection ...................................... 241
Hands-free microphone ................... 33 Labeling ......................................... 244
Menu ............................................. 140 Load index ............................. 245, 249
Operation ....................................... 140 Load rating .................................... 249
Phone book .................................... 141 Messages in the multifunction
Redialing ........................................ 142 display ................................... 283, 298
Temperature MOExtended .................................. 347
Interior temperature .............. 168, 176 Ply composition and material
Outside .................................. 127, 133 used ............................................... 250
Tether anchorage points Problems under-/overinflation ...... 230
see Children in the vehicle Retreads ........................................ 227
Tie-down rings ................................... 188 Rims and tires (technical data) ...... 347
Tightening torque Rotation ......................................... 243
Wheels ........................................... 330 Service life ..................................... 241
Time setting ....................................... 133 Sizes .............................................. 347
TIN (Tire Identification Number) ...... 250 Snow chains .................................. 252
Tire and Loading Information Speed rating .......................... 246, 250
placard ............................................... 236 Storing ........................................... 242
Tire and loading terminology ........... 248 Temperature .......................... 229, 243
TIREFIT ............................................... 320 Terminology ................................... 248
Tire Identification Number TIREFIT (tire repair kit) ................... 320
see TIN Tire Identification Number ............. 250
Tire inflation pressure Tire pressure loss warning system . 231
Checking ........................................ 230 TPMS low tire pressure/
Important notes on ........................ 229 malfunction telltale ........................ 306
Label on the inside of fuel filler Traction ................................. 242, 250
flap ................................................ 230 Tread ............................................. 251
Placard on driver’s door B-pillar ..... 236 Tread depth ........................... 241, 251
Tire labeling ....................................... 244 Treadwear ...................................... 242
Tire load rating .................................. 249 Treadwear indicators ............. 241, 251
Tire ply composition and material Vehicle maximum load on .............. 251
used .................................................... 250 Wear pattern .................................. 243
Tire pressure loss warning system . 231 Winter tires ............................ 251, 347
Tire repair kit Tire speed rating ....................... 246, 250
see TIREFIT Tongue Weight Rating
Tires ........................................... 227, 347 see TWR
Advanced Tire Pressure Top tether
Monitoring System (Advanced see Children in the vehicle
TPMS) ............................................ 232 Total load limit ................................... 250
Air pressure ................................... 228 Towing
Care and maintenance ................... 241 Towing eye bolt .............................. 338
Cleaning ......................................... 242 Trailer .................................... 119, 256
Direction of rotation, spinning ....... 240 Vehicle ........................................... 338
Important notes on tire inflation Towing eye bolt ................................. 338
pressure ........................................ 229 Traction ...................................... 242, 250
Inflation pressure ........................... 230 Trailer towing ............................ 119, 256
Coupling a trailer ........................... 257
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 18
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

18 Index

Decoupling ..................................... 259 V


Electrical connections .................... 256
Towing ........................................... 258 Vehicle
Trailer hitch ................................... 256 Battery ........................................... 333
Weights and ratings ....................... 256 Care ............................................... 262
Transfer case ..................................... 122 Control system .............................. 123
Transmission Identification Number (VIN) ........... 344
see Automatic transmission Locking/unlocking ........................... 70
Transmission fluid level .................... 225 Lowering (wheel change) ............... 329
Transmission gear selector lever Modifications and alterations,
see Gear selector lever Operating safety .............................. 22
Transmission positions .................... 118 Towing ........................................... 338
Traveling abroad ............................... 259 Unlocking/locking manually .......... 308
Tread (tires) ....................................... 251 Vehicle dimensions
Tread depth (tires) .................... 241, 251 see Vehicle specification
Vehicle Identification Number
Treadwear .......................................... 242
(VIN) ................................................... 344
Treadwear indicators (tires) .... 241, 251
Vehicle jack
Trip computer menu ......................... 139
see Jack
Trip odometer, resetting ................... 123
Vehicle level control
Turning off the engine ...................... 114
see AIRMATIC
Turn signals ....................................... 100
Vehicle lighting .................................... 97
Cleaning lenses ............................. 265
Vehicle loading
Indicator lamps ................................ 28
Cargo tie-down rings ...................... 188
Messages in the multifunction
Cargo volume, expanding .............. 189
display ........................................... 298
Instructions .................................... 186
TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) ........... 251
Load limit ....................................... 237
Roof rack ....................................... 187
U
Terminology ................................... 248
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Vehicle maximum load on the tire ... 251
Standards .................................. 242, 251 Vehicle specification
Units R 350 ............................................. 346
Selecting digital speedometer R 350 BlueTEC ............................... 346
display mode ................................. 132 Vehicle status message memory .... 130
Selecting speedometer/ Vehicle tool kit .................................. 270
odometer display mode ................. 132 Vehicle washing
Unleaded gasoline, premium ........... 353 see Vehicle care
Unlocking the vehicle Vehicle weights
KEYLESS-GO .................................... 71 see Vehicle specification
Manually ........................................ 308
SmartKey ......................................... 70 W
Upholstery, cleaning ......................... 268
Warning lamps
Useful features .................................. 201
see Lamps, Indicator and warning
Warning sounds
Distance warning function ............. 152
Distronic ........................................ 147
Driver’s or passenger’s seat belt ..... 51
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 19
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Index 19

Parking brake ................................ 286


Parktronic system .......................... 159
Seat belt telltale ............................ 302
Warranty coverage ............................ 344
Washer and headlamp cleaning
system ................................................ 357
Washer fluid
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 290
Mixing ratio .................................... 357
Refilling .......................................... 226
Washing the vehicle .......................... 262
Wear pattern (tires) .......................... 243
Weights (vehicle)
see Vehicle specification
Wheel
Changing ....................................... 319
Removing ....................................... 327
Spare ............................................. 319
Tightening torque ........................... 330
Wheels, sizes ..................................... 347
Wheels, Tires and .............................. 227
Window curtain air bags ..................... 41
Windows
see Power windows
Windows, cleaning ............................ 266
Windshield
Cleaning wiper blades .................... 266
Infrared reflecting .......................... 217
Washer fluid ................................... 357
Wipers ........................................... 104
Windshield wipers
Replacing wiper blades .................. 317
Winter cover .............................. 224, 251
Winter driving
Instructions .................................... 252
Radiator cover ............................... 251
Snow chains .................................. 252
Tires ............................................... 251
Winter tires ................................ 251, 347
Wood trims, cleaning ........................ 268
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 20
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

20 Introduction

Product Information We continuously strive to improve our


product and ask for your understanding that
Please observe the following in your own best we reserve the right to make changes in
interest: design and equipment. Therefore,
We recommend using Genuine Mercedes- information, illustrations, and descriptions in
Benz Parts as well as conversion parts and this Operator’s Manual might differ from your
accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle.
vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine their
Vehicle equipment
reliability, safety and special suitability for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Your vehicle may have some or all of the
We are unable to make an assessment for equipment described in this manual.
other products and therefore cannot be held Therefore, you may find explanations for
responsible for them, even if in individual optional equipment not installed in your
cases an official approval or authorization by vehicle. If you have any questions about
governmental or other agencies should exist. operating particular equipment, any
Use of such parts and accessories could authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad
adversely affect the safety, performance or to demonstrate the proper procedures.
reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use Optional equipment is also described in this
them. manual, including operating instructions
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts and pre- wherever necessary. Since they are special-
approved conversion parts and accessories order items, the descriptions and illustrations
are available at any authorized Mercedes- herein may vary slightly from the actual
Benz Center. In addition, you will receive equipment of your vehicle.
comprehensive information on permissible If there are any equipment details that are not
technical modifications and expert shown or described in this Operator’s
installations. Manual, any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures. The
Operator’s Manual Operator’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet
are important documents and should be kept
Notes with the vehicle.
This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal
of useful information. We urge you to read it
carefully and familiarize yourself with the Service and warranty information
vehicle before driving. The Service and Warranty Information
For your own safety and longer service life of booklet contains detailed information about
the vehicle, we urge you to follow the the warranties covering your Mercedes-Benz,
instructions and warnings contained in this including:
Operator’s Manual. Ignoring them could RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
result in damage to the vehicle or personal
injury to you or others. Vehicle damage REmission System Warranty
caused by failure to follow instructions is not REmission Performance Warranty
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited RCalifornia,
Connecticut, Maine,
Warranty.
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 21
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Introduction 21

Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission Written notification should not be sent to a
Control System Warranty1 dealer, it should be addressed to
RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Laws) Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Important notice for California retail
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz
automobiles Maintenance
Under California law you may be entitled to a The Maintenance Booklet describes all the
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the necessary maintenance work which should
purchase price or lease price, if after a be performed at regular intervals.
reasonable number of repair attempts Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its you when you take the vehicle to an
authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
one or more substantial defects or service. The service advisor will record each
malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered service in the booklet for you.
by its express warranty. During the period of
18 months from original delivery of the
vehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles Roadside Assistance
(approximately 29 000 km) on the odometer
of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
reasonable number of repair attempts is Program provides factory-trained technical
presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the
more of the following occurs: toll-free Roadside Assistance number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
(1) the same substantial defect or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily will be answered by Mercedes-Benz
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect Customer Assistance Representatives
or malfunction has been subject to repair 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
two or more times, and you have directly Roadside Assistance will be provided in
notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in accordance with standard program
writing of the need for its repair, guidelines which include providing service to
(2) the same substantial defect or the vehicle up to a reasonable distance from
malfunction of a less serious nature than a paved roadway. We will make every effort
category (1) has been subject to repair to assist in a breakdown situation, however,
four or more times and you have directly the accessibility of your vehicle will be
notified us in writing of the need for its determined by our authorized Mercedes-Benz
repair, or Center technician or the tow service provider
on a case-by-case basis and may be a factor
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of
in our ability to respond.
repair of the same or different substantial
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative Additional charges may be applicable for a
total of more than 30 calendar days. breakdown location determined not to be a
reasonably accessible roadside location as

1 Applicable to vehicles with gasoline engine only.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 22
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

22 Introduction

determined by our authorized technician and Operating safety


tow service provider.
For additional information refer to the G Warning!
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Work improperly carried out on electronic
Program brochure (in the USA) or the components and associated software could
Roadside Assistance section of the Service cause them to cease functioning. Because the
and Warranty Information Booklet (in vehicle’s electronic components are
Canada) in your vehicle literature portfolio. interconnected, any modifications made may
produce an undesired effect on other
systems. Electronic malfunctions could
Change of address or ownership seriously impair the operating safety of your
If you change your address, be sure to send vehicle.
in the “Change of Address Notice” found in Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
the Service and Warranty Information for repairs or modifications to electronic
Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz components.
Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at Other improper work or modifications on the
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service vehicle could also have a negative impact on
(in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This will the operating safety of the vehicle.
assist us in contacting you in a timely manner
Some safety systems only function while the
should the need arise.
engine is running. You should therefore never
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all turn off the engine while driving.
literature with the vehicle to make it available
to the next operator. G Warning!
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used tires/wheels may cause serious damage and
Truck” found in the Service and Warranty impair the operating safety of your vehicle.
Information Booklet, or call the Mercedes- Such blows can be caused, for example, by
Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the running over an obstacle, road debris or a
USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer pothole. If you feel a sudden significant
Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect
that damage to your vehicle as occurred:
Rturn on your hazard warning flashers
Operating your vehicle outside the
USA or Canada Rslow down carefully
Rdrive with caution to an area which is a safe
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign
countries, please be aware that: distance from the road
RService facilities or replacement parts may Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/
not be readily available. wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle
appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
RUnleaded gasoline for vehicles with authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or other
catalytic converters may not be available; qualified maintenance or repair facility for
the use of leaded fuels will damage the further inspection or repairs.
catalysts.
RGasoline may have a considerably lower
octane rating, and improper fuel can cause
engine damage.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 23
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Introduction 23

Proper use of the vehicle Reporting safety defects


Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are
For the USA only:
familiar with the following information and
rules: The following text is published as required of
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
Rthe safety precautions in this manual Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
Rthe “Technical data” section in this manual “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
Rtraffic rules and regulations of 1966”.
Rmotor vehicle laws and safety standards
Reporting safety defects
G Warning!
Various warning labels are attached to your If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
vehicle. These warning labels are intended to which could cause a crash or could cause
make you and others aware of various risks. injury or death, you should immediately
Do not remove any of these warning labels inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
unless explicitly instructed to do so by Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
information on the label itself. Removing notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
warning labels may cause you and others to If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
be unaware of certain risks which may result open an investigation, and if it finds that a
in an accident and/or personal injury. safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
Problems with your vehicle individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If you should experience a problem with your To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
affect its safe operation, we urge you to (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center www.safercar.gov; or write to:
immediately to have the problem diagnosed Administrator, NHTSA Headquarters,
and corrected if required. If the matter is not 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,
handled to your satisfaction, please discuss Washington, DC 20590.
the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center You can also obtain other information about
management or, if necessary, contact us at motor vehicle safety from
one of the following addresses: www.safercar.gov.
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Vehicle data recording
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Information regarding electronic
recording devices
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department (Including notice pursuant to California Code
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. § 9951)
98 Vanderhoof Avenue Please note that your vehicle is equipped with
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 devices that can record vehicle systems data
and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system, may
transmit some data in certain accidents.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 24
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

24 Introduction

This information helps, for example, to


diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and
to continuously improve vehicle safety.
Daimler may access the information and
share it with others
Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis
purposes
Rwith the consent of the vehicle owner or
lessee
Rin response to an official request by law
enforcement or other government agency
Rfor use in dispute resolution involving
Daimler, its affiliates or sales/service
organization and/or
Ras otherwise required or permitted by law
Please check the Tele Aid subscription
service agreement for details regarding the
information that may be recorded or
transmitted via that system.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 25
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

25

Exterior view ....................................... 26


Cockpit ................................................. 27
Instrument cluster .............................. 28

At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 30
Center console .................................... 31
Overhead control panel ...................... 32
Door control panel .............................. 33
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 26
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

26 Exterior view

Exterior view
At a glance

i This Operator’s Manual describes all features, standard or optional, potentially available
for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please be aware that your vehicle might not be
equipped with all features described in this manual.
Function Page Function Page
: Rear lamps 312 Wiper blades, cleaning 266

; Fuel filler flap 220


D Hood 222

= Exterior rear view mirrors 94


E Front lamps 312

? Power tilt/sliding sunroof 181


F Headlamp cleaning system 101
Panorama roof with power G Front towing eye 338
tilt/sliding panel 184
H Tires and wheels 227
A Windshield: Rims and tires 347
Wiping with washer fluid 105
I Rear towing eye 338
Cleaning 266
J Rear window wiper/washer 105
B Doors:
Wiper blade, replacing 317
Locking and unlocking 70
Wiper blade, cleaning 266
Locking and unlocking
manually 308 K Tailgate 75
C Wipers 103 Power tailgate 76
Wiper blades, replacing 317 L Rear window defroster 180
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 27
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Cockpit 27

Cockpit

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Cruise control lever: I Starter switch 79
Cruise control 142 J Steering wheel adjustment,
Distronic 145 manual 91
; Instrument cluster 28, K Steering wheel adjustment,
122 electrical 91
= Multifunction steering 30, Heated steering wheel 93
wheel 123 L On-board diagnostics
? Horn (OBD) socket
A Steering wheel gearshift M Hood lock release 222
control 121 N Parking brake release 114
B Gear selector lever 116 O Parking brake pedal 114
C Front Parktronic warning P Door control panel 33
indicators 158
Q Exterior lamp switch 97
D Overhead control panel 32
R Combination switch:
E Glove box lid release, glove
box lock 198 Turn signals 100
Wipers 103
F Glove box 197 High beam 100
G Center console 31
H Power outlet 205
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 28
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

28 Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster
At a glance

Function Page Function Page


: # Left turn signal $ Brake warning lamp,
indicator lamp USA only 301
d ESP® warning lamp 303
; To dim instrument cluster
· Distance warning
illumination 123
lamp3 304
= Reset button for: J Brake warning lamp,
Trip odometer 123 Canada only 301
Settings 131 h Combination low tire
? To brighten instrument pressure/TPMS
cluster illumination 123 malfunction telltale, USA 232,
only 306
A ! Right turn signal
indicator lamp
B Clock 133
C Speedometer with:
! Antilock Brake
System (ABS) indicator
lamp 300
È Variable speed limiter
indicator lamp2
2 Lamp without function. It illuminates when the ignition is on. It should go out when the engine is running.
3 Vehicles without Distronic: Warning lamp without function. It illuminates when the ignition is on. It should
go out when the engine is running.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 29
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Instrument cluster 29

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
D Multifunction display with: 8 Fuel filler flap
indicator: The fuel filler flap
Trip odometer 125
is located on the rear right-
Main odometer 125 hand side.
E Tachometer with: G Multifunction display with:
7 Seat belt telltale 51, Outside temperature
302 indicator or digital
% Preglow indicator speedometer (depending
lamp, diesel engine only 111 on selected setting in the
+ Supplemental control system) 127
Restraint System (SRS) 36, Transmission position
indicator lamp 303 indicator 118
L Low-beam headlamp Gear range indicator 120
indicator lamp 98 Automatic transmission
; Engine malfunction program mode indicator 120
indicator lamp, Canada only 305 Distance warning function 138,
! Engine malfunction indicator 152
indicator lamp, USA only 305 Rear window wiper
K High-beam headlamp indicator 105
indicator lamp 100
F Fuel gauge with:
Fuel tank reserve warning
lamp 305

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 30
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

30 Multifunction steering wheel

Multifunction steering wheel Function Page


= Press button V or U
At a glance

to select next/previous
menu. 123
Press button & or *
briefly:
to move within a menu
to select previous or next
track, scene or stored
station within Audio/DVD
menu 128
to switch to the phone book
and select a name or
number within Telephone
menu 140
Press and hold button
& or *:
to select previous or next
Function Page track with quick search or
to select previous or next
: Multifunction display 125 station in station list or
; Press button 6: wave band within Audio/
DVD menu 128
to answer a call 140
to start the quick search in
to dial4 140 the phone book within
to redial4 140 Telephone menu 140
Press button ~: Press button A to turn
to end a call 140 the Voice Control System
to reject an incoming call 140 off5, see separate operating
Press button W or X: instructions.
to select submenus in the
Settings menu 131
to set values
to set the volume
Press button ? to turn
the Voice Control System
on5, see separate operating
instructions.

4 Function only available in telephone menu.


5 Vehicles without Voice Control System: Button without function.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 31
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Center console 31

Center console Function Page


Upper part D Hazard warning flasher

At a glance
switch 101
E Alarm system indicator
lamp 68
F Parktronic system
deactivation switch 159
G Electronic Stability
Program (ESP®) switch 65
H Seat ventilation, driver’s
side 90
I Seat heating, driver’s side 91
J Adaptive Damping System
(ADS) switch 153

Function Page
: COMAND system, see
separate operating
instructions
; Climate control system 162
Rear window defroster 180
= Seat heating, front
passenger side 91
? Seat ventilation, front
passenger side 90
A Vehicle level control switch 154
B Program mode selector
switch for automatic
transmission 120
C Front passenger front air
bag off indicator lamp (USA 42,
only) 307
Front passenger front air
bag off indicator lamp 45,
(Canada only) 307

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 32
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

32 Overhead control panel

Lower part Overhead control panel


At a glance

Function Page Function Page


: Storage compartment 198 : Left front reading lamp on/
off 102
; Ashtray with storage
compartment 204 ; Automatic interior lighting 102
Cigarette lighter 205 = Rear interior lighting on/off 102
= Cup holder 201 ? Front interior lighting on/
? Front armrest storage off 102
compartment/telephone A Right reading lamp on/off 102
tray 198
B Front right interior lamp 102
A Removable card/ticket
holder, bottle opener 201 C Power tilt/sliding sunroof
switch 181
Power tilt/sliding panel
switch 184
D SOS button (Tele Aid
system) 209
E Interior rear view mirror 94
F Reading lamps 102
G Garage door opener 213
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 33
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Door control panel 33

Function Page Door control panel


H Hands-free microphone for

At a glance
Tele Aid (emergency call
system), telephone, and
Voice Control System, see
separate operating
instructions
I Front left interior lamp 102

Function Page
: Inside door handle 74
; Central locking/unlocking
switch 74
= Exterior rear view mirror
adjustment 94
? Selection buttons for
exterior rear view mirror
adjustment 94
Power-folding exterior rear
view mirrors 95
A Switches for opening/
closing front and rear door
windows 106
B Rear door window override
switch 62
C Hinged quarter window
switch 106
D Remote tailgate release
switch, power tailgate 78

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 34
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

34
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 35
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

35

Vehicle equipment .............................. 36


Occupant safety .................................. 36
Panic alarm .......................................... 62
Driving safety systems ....................... 63
Anti-theft systems .............................. 67

Safety and security


251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 36
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

36 Occupant safety

Vehicle equipment G Warning!


Modifications to or work improperly
i This Operator’s Manual describes all conducted on restraint system components
features, standard or optional, potentially or their wiring, as well as tampering with
available for your vehicle at the time of interconnected electronic systems, can lead
Safety and security

purchase. Please be aware that your to the restraint systems no longer functioning
vehicle might not be equipped with all as intended.
features described in this manual. Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices
(ETDs), for example, could deploy
inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents
Occupant safety although the deceleration threshold for air
Introduction bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,
never modify the restraint systems. Do not
In this section you will learn the most tamper with electronic components or their
important facts about the restraint system software.
components of the vehicle.
The restraint systems are: i See “Children in the vehicle”
RSeat belts (Y page 55) for information on
Rinfants and children traveling with you in
RChild restraints
the vehicle
RLower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren Rrestraint systems for infants and children
(LATCH)
Additional protection potential is provided by:
RSupplemental Restraint System (SRS) with SRS indicator lamp
- Air bags The SRS system conducts a self-test when
- Air bag control unit (with crash sensors) the ignition is switched on and in regular
intervals while the engine is running. This
- Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) for
facilitates detection of system malfunctions.
seat belts
The SRS indicator lamp + in the
- Seat belt force limiter instrument cluster comes on when the
RNECK-PRO active front head restraints ignition is switched on. It goes out no later
than a few seconds after the engine has been
RPreventive occupant safety (PRE-SAFE®) started.
RAir bag system components with The SRS components are in operational
- Front passenger front air bag off readiness when the SRS indicator lamp
indicator lamp + is not lit while the engine is running.
- USA only: Front passenger seat with A malfunction in the system has been
Occupant Classification System (OCS) detected if the SRS indicator lamp +
Rfails to go out after approximately
- Canada only: Front passenger seat with
4 seconds after the engine was started
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system
Rdoes not come on at all
Although the systems are independent, their
Rcomes on after the engine was started or
protective functions work in conjunction with
each other. while driving
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 37
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Occupant safety 37

G Warning! Deployment of the air bags temporarily


The SRS self-check has detected a releases a small amount of dust from the air
malfunction when the SRS indicator lamp bags. This dust, however, is neither harmful
+: to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the
vehicle. The dust might cause some
Rdoes not come on at all

Safety and security


temporary breathing difficulty for people with
Rdoes not go out after 4 seconds after the asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid
engine was started this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as
Rcomes on while driving soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
For your safety, we strongly recommend that vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get fresh
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz air by opening a window or door.
Center immediately to have the system
checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be G Warning!
activated when needed in an accident, which To reduce the risk of injury when the front air
could result in serious or fatal injury. The SRS bags inflate, it is very important for the driver
might also deploy unexpectedly and and front passenger to always be in a properly
unnecessarily which could also result in injury seated position and to wear their respective
as well. seat belt.
In addition, improper work on the SRS creates For maximum protection in the event of a
a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or collision always be in normal seated position
causing unintended air bag deployment. Work with your back against the seat backrest.
on the SRS must therefore only be performed Fasten your seat belt and make sure it is
by qualified technicians. Contact an properly positioned on your body.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system speed and force, a proper seating position
to accommodate a person with disabilities, and correct positioning of the hands on the
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe
USA only: Call our Customer Assistance distance from the air bag. Occupants who are
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes not wearing their seat belt, are not seated
(1-800-367-6372) for details. properly or are too close to the air bag can be
seriously injured or killed by an air bag as it
inflates with great force instantaneously:
Air bags RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a

G Warning! position that is as upright as possible with


Air bags are designed to reduce the potential your back against the seat backrest.
of injury and fatality in certain RMove the driver’s seat as far back as
Rfrontal impacts (front air bags) possible, still permitting proper operation
of vehicle controls. The distance from the
Rside impacts (side impact air bags and center of the driver’s chest to the center of
window curtain air bags) the air bag cover on the steering wheel
Rrollovers (window curtain air bags) must be at least 10 inches (25 cm) or more.
However, no system available today can You should be able to accomplish this by
completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 38
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

38 Occupant safety

you have any difficulties, please contact an There is a possibility for a side impact air bag-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. related injury if occupants, especially
RDo not lean your head or chest close to the children, are not properly seated or restrained
steering wheel or dashboard. when next to a side impact air bag which
needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in
RKeep hands on the outside of the steering
Safety and security

order to do its job.


wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
the rim can increase the risk and potential
follow these guidelines:
severity of hand/arm injury when the driver
front air bag inflates. (1) Always sit as upright as possible,
wear the seat belt properly, and for
RAdjust the front passenger seat as far as
children 12 years old and under,
possible rearward from the dashboard
use an appropriately sized infant
when the seat is occupied.
restraint, toddler restraint, or
ROccupants, especially children, should booster seat recommended for the
never place their bodies or lean their heads size and weight of the child.
in the area of the door where the side (2) Always wear seat belts properly.
impact air bag inflates. This could result in
serious injuries or death should the side Air bags are designed to deploy only in certain
impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as Rfrontal impacts (front air bags)
upright as possible, wear the seat belt
properly and use an appropriately sized Rside impacts (side impact and window
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or curtain air bags) which exceed preset
booster seat recommended for the size and deployment thresholds
weight of the child. Rrollovers (window curtain air bags)
RCanada only: Children 12 years old and Only in the event of such a situation will they
under must never ride in the front seat, provide their supplemental protection.
except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized The driver and passengers should always
BabySmart™ compatible child seat, which wear their seat belts. Otherwise it is not
operates with the BabySmart™ air bag possible for the air bags to provide their
deactivation system installed in the vehicle supplemental protection.
to deactivate the front passenger front air
In case of other types of impacts and impacts
bag when it is installed properly. Otherwise
below air bag deployment thresholds, air
they will be struck by the air bag when it
bags will not deploy. The driver and
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
passengers will then be protected to the
or fatal injury will result.
extent possible by a properly fastened seat
Failure to follow these instructions can result belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also
in severe injuries to you or other occupants. needed to provide the best possible
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you protection in a rollover.
make the buyer aware of this safety Air bags are not a substitute for seat belts.
information. Be sure to give the buyer this Always wear your seat belt, regardless of
Operator’s Manual. whether or not your vehicle is equipped with
air bags.
G Warning!
It is important to your safety and that of your
Accident research shows that the safest place passengers to have deployed air bags
for children in an automobile is in a rear seat. replaced and to have any malfunctioning air
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 39
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Occupant safety 39

bags repaired. This will help to make sure the cover, outboard sides of the seat
air bags will continue to provide supplemental backrests, door trim panels, or door frame
crash protection for occupants. trims.
RDo not install additional electrical/
Safety guidelines for the seat belt, electronic equipment on or near SRS
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD)

Safety and security


components and wiring.
and air bag
RKeep area between air bags and occupants
G Warning! free of objects (e.g. packages, purses,
RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have umbrellas, etc.).
been subjected to stress in an accident RDo not hang items such as coat hangers
must be replaced. Their anchoring points from the coat hooks or handles over the
must also be checked. Only use seat belts door. These items may be thrown around in
installed or supplied by an authorized the vehicle and cause head and other
Mercedes-Benz Center. injuries when the window curtain air bag is
RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency deployed.
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain RAir bag system components will be hot after
perchlorate material, which may require an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.
special handling and regard for the
RNever place your feet on the instrument
environment. Check with your local
government’s disposal guidelines. panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
California residents, see keep both feet on the floor in front of the
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ seat.
Perchlorate/index.cfm. RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a
RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD causing unintended air bag deployment.
that has deployed must be replaced. PRE- Work on the SRS must therefore only be
performed by qualified technicians.
SAFE® has electrically operated reversible
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
pre-tensioners in addition to the
Center.
pyrotechnic ETDs.
RFor your protection and the protection of
RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
others, when scrapping the air bag unit or
They could tear.
ETD, our safety instructions must be
RDo not make any modification that could followed. These instructions are available
change the effectiveness of the seat belts. from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may Center.
severely weaken them. In a crash they may RGiven the considerable deployment speed,
not be able to provide adequate protection. required inflation volume, and the material
RNo modifications of any kind may be made of the air bags, there is the possibility of
to any components or wiring of the SRS. abrasions or other, potentially more serious
RDo no change or remove any component or
injuries resulting from air bag deployment.
part of the SRS. If you sell your vehicle, we strongly
RDo not install additional trim material, seat recommend that you inform the subsequent
covers, badges, etc. over the steering owner that the vehicle is equipped with SRS.
wheel hub, front passenger front air bag Also refer them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 40
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

40 Occupant safety

Front air bags stage inflation of the front passenger front air
bag.
G Observe Safety notes, see page 37. The air bags will not deploy in impacts which
do not exceed the system’s preset
deployment thresholds. You will then be
Safety and security

protected by the fastened seat belts.


The front air bags will not deploy in the event
of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of
longitudinal deceleration or acceleration
exceeds the preset deployment threshold for
the front air bags.
The front passenger front air bag will only be
deployed if
Driver’s front air bag : and front passenger Rvehicles with OCS, USA only: the system,
front air bag ; are designed to provide based on OCS weight sensor readings,
increased protection for the driver and front detects that the front passenger seat is
passenger against the risk of injuries to the occupied
head and thorax. Rthe 42 indicator lamp in the
Driver and front passenger front air bags are center console is not lit
deployed (USA only: (Y page 42),
Rin the event of certain frontal impacts Canada only: (Y page 45))
Rthe impact exceeds a preset deployment
Rif impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold threshold
Rif the system determines that air bag ! Vehicles with BabySmart™ air bag
deployment can offer additional protection deactivation system (Canada only): Do not
to that provided by the seat belt place objects heavier than 20 lb (9 kg) on
Rdepending on whether the respective seat the front passenger seat. This could cause
belt is in use the front or side impact air bag on the front
passenger side to deploy in a crash which
Rindependently of the side impact air bags exceeds the system’s deployment
and/or the window curtain air bags threshold.
The front air bags in this vehicle have been
designed to inflate in two stages. This allows Side impact air bags
the air bags to have different rates of inflation.
The rate of inflation is based on the vehicle G Observe Safety notes, see page 37.
deceleration rate as assessed by the air bag G Warning!
control unit. The pressure sensors for side impact air bag
Vehicles with OCS, USA only: The front control are located in the doors. Do not
passenger front air bag deployment is modify any components of the doors or door
additionally influenced by the passenger’s trim panels including, for example, the
weight category as identified by the Occupant addition of door speakers.
Classification System (OCS) (Y page 42). Improper repair work on the doors or the
Vehicles with OCS, USA only: The lighter the modification or addition of components to the
front passenger-side occupant, the higher the doors create a risk of rendering the side
vehicle deceleration rate required for second
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 41
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Occupant safety 41

impact air bags inoperative or causing deceleration or acceleration exceeds the


unintended air bag deployment. Work on the preset deployment threshold for the side air
doors must therefore only be performed by bags.
qualified technicians. Contact an authorized ! Vehicles with BabySmart™ air bag
Mercedes-Benz Center. deactivation system (Canada only): Do not

Safety and security


place objects heavier than 20 lb (9 kg) on
the front passenger seat. This could cause
the front or side impact air bag on the front
passenger side to deploy in a crash which
exceeds the system’s deployment
threshold.
G Warning!
Only use seat covers which have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle model. Using other seat covers may
interfere with or prevent the deployment of
Front side impact air bags : and rear side the side impact air bags. Contact an
impact air bags ; are designed to provide authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
increased protection for the thorax but not availability.
the head, neck and arms.
The side impact air bags are deployed Window curtain air bags
Ron the impacted side of the vehicle G Observe Safety notes, see page 37.
Rin side impacts exceeding a preset
deployment threshold
Rregardless of whether the seat belts on the
impacted side of the vehicle are in use
Rindependently of the front air bags
Rindependently of the ETDs
Vehicles with OCS (USA only): The front
passenger side impact air bag will not deploy
if the OCS senses that the front passenger
seat is empty and the front passenger seat
belt is not fastened. With the front passenger Window curtain air bags : are designed to
seat empty and the seat belt fastened, the provide increased protection for the head but
front passenger side impact air bag will not the chest or arms.
deploy independently of the empty seat. Window curtain air bags : are deployed
Whether a seat belt is recognized as fastened
Ron the impacted side of the vehicle
depends on whether or not the latch plate is
properly inserted into the buckle. Rin side impacts exceeding a preset
The side impact air bags are not deployed in deployment threshold
side impacts which do not exceed the Rindependently of the front air bags
system’s deployment threshold. Rregardless of whether the front passenger
The side air bags will not deploy in the event seat is occupied
of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of lateral
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 42
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

42 Occupant safety

Rregardless of whether the seat belt on the objects applying pressure to the back of the
impacted side of the vehicle is in use seat. Always make sure the seat has
Rin certain vehicle rollovers, if the system clearance in all directions at all times.
determines that air bag deployment can If your seat, including the trim cover and
offer additional protection to that provided cushion, needs to be serviced in any way, take
Safety and security

by the seat belt the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz


Center.
Window curtain air bags : are not deployed
Only seat accessories approved by
in impacts which do not exceed the system’s
Mercedes-Benz may be used.
deployment threshold.
Both the driver and the front passenger
Window curtain air bags : deploy in the area
should always use the 42
indicated by the arrows.
indicator lamp as an indication of whether or
not the front passenger is properly
positioned.
Occupant Classification System
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is G Warning!
standard equipment in USA. If the 42 indicator lamp
The OCS activates or deactivates the front illuminates when an adult or someone larger
passenger front air bag automatically. The than a small individual is in the front
respective status is based on the classified passenger seat, have the front passenger
occupant weight category determined by reposition himself or herself in the seat until
weight sensor readings from the front the 42 indicator lamp goes out,
passenger seat. or check whether objects are caught under or
around the seat.
The system does not deactivate
In the event of a collision, the air bag control
Rthe front passenger side impact air bag unit will not allow front passenger front air bag
Rthe window curtain air bag deployment when the OCS has classified the
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) front passenger seat occupant as weighting
as much as or less than a typical 12-month-
To be classified correctly, the front passenger old child in a standard child restraint or if the
must sit front passenger seat is classified as being
Rwith the seat belt properly fastened empty.
Rin a position that is as upright as possible When the OCS senses that the front
with the back against the seat backrest passenger seat occupant is classified as
being up to or less than the weight of a typical
Rwith the feet on the floor 12-month-old child in a standard child
If the occupant’s weight is transferred to restraint, the 42 indicator lamp
another object in the vehicle (e.g. by leaning will illuminate when the engine is started and
on armrests), the OCS may not be able to remain illuminated, indicating that the front
properly approximate the occupant’s weight passenger front air bag is deactivated.
category. When the OCS senses that the front
Furthermore, the occupant weight may passenger seat is classified as being empty,
appear to increase or decrease due to the the 42 indicator lamp will
following: objects hanging on the seat, lodged illuminate when the engine is started and
underneath the seat, stuffed between the remain illuminated, indicating that the front
seat and middle console or the seat and door, passenger front air bag is deactivated.
other passengers pushing on the seat, or
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 43
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Occupant safety 43

When the OCS senses that the front For more information on air bag display
passenger seat occupant is classified as messages in the multifunction display, see
being heavier than the weight of a typical (Y page 277).
12-month-old child seated in a standard child
G Warning!
restraint or as being a small individual (such
According to accident statistics, children are

Safety and security


as a young teenager or a small adult), the
safer when properly restrained in the rear
42 indicator lamp will illuminate
seating positions than in the front seating
for approximately 6 seconds when the engine
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
is started and then, depending on occupant
children be placed in the rear seats whenever
weight sensor readings from the seat, remain
possible. Regardless of seating position,
illuminated or go out. With the
children 12 years old and under must be
42 indicator lamp illuminated,
seated and properly secured in an appropriate
the front passenger front air bag is
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster
deactivated. With the 42
seat recommended for the size and weight of
indicator lamp out, the front passenger front
the child.
air bag is activated.
The infant or child restraint must be properly
When the OCS senses that the front
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat
passenger seat occupant is classified as an
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and
adult or someone larger than a small
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the
individual, the 42 indicator lamp
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds
Occupants, especially children, should always
when the engine is started and then go out,
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
indicating that the front passenger front air
properly and use an appropriately sized infant
bag is activated.
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
If the 42 indicator lamp is recommended for the size and weight of the
illuminated, the front passenger front air bag child.
is deactivated and will not be deployed.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
If the 42 indicator lamp is not an inflating air bag. Note the following
illuminated, the front passenger front air bag important information when circumstances
is activated and will be deployed require you to place a child in the front
Rin the event of certain frontal impacts passenger seat:
Rif impact exceeds a preset deployment RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag
threshold technology designed to deactivate the front
Rindependently
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
of the side impact air bags
when the system senses the weight of a
If the front passenger front air bag is typical 12-month-old child or less along
deployed, the rate of inflation will be with the weight of a standard appropriate
influenced by child restraint on the front passenger seat.
Rthe rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
assessed by the air bag control unit front passenger seat will be seriously
Rthe front passenger’s weight category as injured or even killed if the front passenger
identified by the OCS front air bag inflates in a collision which
could occur under some circumstances,
even with the air bag technology installed
in your vehicle. The only means to

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 44
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

44 Occupant safety

completely eliminate this risk is to never where the system suppresses deployment
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint of the front passenger front air bag even
in the front seat. We therefore strongly though the impact met the criteria and was
recommend that you always place a child of sufficient severity to deploy the driver
in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat. front air bag
Safety and security

RIf you must install a rear-facing child Rthat the seat was occupied by a small
restraint on the front passenger seat individual (such as a young teenager or a
because circumstances require you to do small adult) or a child who weighs more
so, make sure the 42 than the weight of a typical 12-month-old
indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating child in a standard child restraint – both of
that the front passenger front air bag is which are instances where the system may
deactivated. Should the 42 suppress deployment of the front
indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while passenger front air bag even though the
the restraint is installed, please check impact met the criteria and was of
installation. Periodically check the sufficient severity to deploy the driver front
42 indicator lamp while air bag
driving to make sure the 42
indicator lamp is illuminated. If the
42 indicator lamp goes out or
remains out, do not transport a child on the
front passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front passenger
front air bag inflates.
RIf you have to place a child in a forward-
The 42 indicator lamp : will be
facing child restraint on the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as possible, illuminated, except with the SmartKey
use the proper child restraint removed from the starter switch or with the
recommended for the age, size and weight starter switch in position 0.
of the child, and secure child restraint with G Warning!
the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child If the red SRS indicator lamp + in the
seat manufacturer’s instructions. For instrument cluster and the 42
children larger than the typical 12-month-
indicator lamp are lit at the same time, there
old child, the front passenger front air bag
is a malfunction in the OCS. The front
may or may not be activated.
passenger front air bag will be deactivated in
Deployment of the driver front air bag does this case. Have the system checked as soon
not mean that the front passenger front air as possible by qualified technicians. Contact
bag also should have deployed. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The OCS may have determined Only have the seat repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Rthat the seat was empty or occupied by the
weight up to or less than that of a typical
12-month-old child seated in a standard
child restraint – both of which are instances
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 45
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Occupant safety 45

In order to ensure proper operation of the air empty, the 42 indicator lamp
bag system and OCS: will illuminate and not go out.
RDo not place more than 4.4 lb (2 kg) into G Warning!
the parcel net on the back of the front If the 42 indicator lamp does not
passenger seat. Otherwise, the OCS may illuminate, the system is not functioning. You

Safety and security


not be able to properly approximate the must contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
occupant weight category. Center before seating any child on the front
RDo not place objects under and/or around passenger seat.
the front passenger seat.
For more information, see the “Practical
RDo not hang anything from or attach any hints” section (Y page 307).
items to the seats.
G Warning!
RDo not stuff objects such as books between
Never place anything between seat cushion
the front passenger seat and the center
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
console or front passenger door.
the effectiveness of the OCS. The bottom and
RDo not move the front passenger seat back of the child seat must make full contact
backwards against stiff objects. with the passenger seat cushion and
RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a backrest.
position that is as upright as possible with If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passenger
your back against the seat backrest. seat backrest.
RWhile seated, an occupant should not An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause
position him/herself in such a way as to injuries to the child in case of an accident,
cause the occupant’s weight to be lifted instead of increasing protection for the child.
from the seat bottom as this may result in Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
the OCS being unable to correctly installation of child seats.
approximate the occupant’s weight
category.
RRead and observe all warnings in this BabySmart™ air bag deactivation
chapter. system
The BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system
OCS Self-test is standard equipment in Canada.
After turning the SmartKey in the starter G Warning!
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the According to accident statistics, children are
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once or safer when properly restrained in the rear
twice, the 42 indicator lamp seating positions than in the front seating
illuminates. If an adult occupant is properly position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
sitting on the front passenger seat and the children be placed in the rear seats whenever
system classifies the occupant as an adult, possible. Regardless of seating position,
the 42 indicator lamp will children 12 years old and under must be
illuminate and go out after approximately seated and properly secured in an appropriate
6 seconds. infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster
If the seat is not occupied and the system seat recommended for the size and weight of
classifies the front passenger seat as being the child.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 46
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

46 Occupant safety

The infant or child restraint must be properly Should the 42 indicator lamp
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat not illuminate or go out while the restraint
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and is installed, please check installation.
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the Periodically check the 42
child seat manufacturer’s instructions. indicator lamp while driving to make sure
Safety and security

Occupants, especially children, should always the 42 indicator lamp is


sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt illuminated. If the 42 indicator
properly and use an appropriately sized infant lamp goes out or remains out, do not
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat transport a child on the front passenger
recommended for the size and weight of the seat until the system has been repaired.
child. A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
Children can be killed or seriously injured by front passenger seat will be seriously
an inflating air bag. Note the following injured or even killed if the front passenger
important information when circumstances front air bag inflates.
require you to place a child in the front RIf you have to place a child in a forward-
passenger seat: facing child restraint on the front passenger
RChildren 12 years old and under must never seat, move the seat as far back as possible,
ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes- use the proper child restraint
Benz authorized BabySmart™ compatible recommended for the age, size and weight
child seat, which operates with the of the child, and secure child restraint with
BabySmart™ system installed in the vehicle the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child
to deactivate the front passenger front air seat manufacturer’s instructions.
bag when it is installed properly. Otherwise
they will be struck by the air bag when it G Warning!
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious When using a BabySmart™ compatible child
or fatal injury will result. seat on the front passenger seat, the front
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the passenger front air bag will not deploy only if
front passenger seat will be seriously the 42 indicator lamp remains
injured or even killed if the front passenger illuminated.
front air bag inflates in a collision which Please be sure to check the 42
could occur under some circumstances, indicator lamp every time you use a
even with the air bag technology installed BabySmart™ compatible child seat on the
in your vehicle. The only means to front passenger seat. Should the
completely eliminate this risk is to never 42 indicator lamp go out while
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint the restraint is installed, please check
in the front seat. We therefore strongly installation. If the 42 indicator
recommend that you always place a child lamp remains out, do not use the
in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat. BabySmart™ restraint to transport a child on
RIf you must install a BabySmart™ the front passenger seat until the system has
compatible rear-facing child restraint on been repaired.
the front passenger seat because
circumstances require you to do so, make
sure the 42 indicator lamp is
illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 47
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Occupant safety 47

G Warning!
Do not place powered-on laptops, mobile
phones, electronic tags such as those used in
ski passes and like electronic devices on the
front passenger seat. Signals from such

Safety and security


devices may interfere with the BabySmart™
air bag deactivation system. Such signal
interference may cause the 42
indicator lamp not to come on during self-test.
The SRS indicator lamp + and/or the
42 indicator lamp could be
Special BabySmart™ compatible child seats,
continuously lit, indicating that the system is
designed for use with the Mercedes-Benz
not functioning. The front passenger front air
system, are required for use with the
bag could deploy inadvertently or fail to
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system.
deploy in an accident.
Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for information on availability. With G Warning!
the special child seat installed properly, the
The BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system
front passenger front air bag will not deploy.
will ONLY work with a special child seat
The 42 indicator lamp : will be designed to operate with it. It will not work
illuminated, except with the SmartKey with child seats which are not BabySmart™
removed from the starter switch or with the compatible.
starter switch in position 0.
Never place anything between seat cushion
The system does not deactivate and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
Rthe side impact air bag the effectiveness off the BabySmart™ air bag
Rthe
deactivation system. The bottom of the child
window curtain air bag
seat must make full contact with the front
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly
mounted child seat could cause injuries to the
Self-test BabySmart™ without special child in case of an accident, instead of
child seat installed protecting the child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
installation of special child seats.
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once or
twice, the 42 indicator lamp
comes on for approximately 6 seconds and Seat belts
then goes out. Safety notes
If the 42 indicator lamp should
not come on or is continuously lit, the system The use of seat belts and infant and child
is not functioning. You must see an restraint systems is required by law in all 50
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before states, the District of Columbia, the U.S.
seating any child on the front passenger seat. territories and all Canadian provinces.
More information can be found in the Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
“Practical hints” section (Y page 307). occupants should have their seat belts
fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 48
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

48 Occupant safety

For information on infants and children G Warning!


traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint Damaged seat belts or seat belts that have
systems for infants and children, see been subjected to stress in an accident must
“Children in the vehicle” (Y page 55). be replaced. Also, the seat belt anchoring
G Warning! points must be checked.
Safety and security

Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Only use seat belts which have been approved
Always make sure all of your passengers are by Mercedes-Benz.
properly restrained. You and your passengers Do not make any modifications to the seat
should always wear seat belts. belts. This can lead to unintended activation
Failure to wear and properly fasten and of the ETDs or to their failure to activate when
position your seat belt greatly increases your necessary.
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
accident. severely weaken them. In a crash they may
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can not be able to provide adequate protection.
be considerably more severe without your Have all work carried out only by qualified
seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat technicians. Contact an authorized
belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit Mercedes-Benz Center.
the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from
it. You can be seriously injured or killed. Proper use of seat belts
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are properly wearing G Warning!
your seat belt. The air bags can only protect USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
as intended if the occupants are properly RSeat belts can only protect when used
wearing their seat belts. properly. Never wear seat belts in any other
way than as described in this section, as
G Warning!
that could result in serious injuries in case
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat of an accident.
backrest in an excessively reclined position as
REach occupant should wear their seat belt
this can be dangerous. You could slide under
the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under at all times, because seat belts help reduce
it, the seat belt would apply force at the the likelihood of and potential severity of
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious injuries in accidents, including rollovers.
or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and The integrated restraint system includes
seat belt provide the best restraint when the SRS (driver front air bag, front passenger
wearer is in a position that is as upright as front air bag, side impact air bags, window
possible and the seat belt is properly curtain air bags for door windows),
positioned on the body. Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs),
seat belt force limiters, and front seat knee
G Warning! bolsters.
Never let more people ride in the vehicle than The system is designed to enhance the
there are seat belts available. Make sure protection offered to properly belted
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly occupants in certain frontal (front air bags
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never and ETDs) and side (side impact air bags,
use a seat belt for more than one person at a window curtain air bags, and ETDs) impacts
time. which exceed preset deployment
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 49
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Occupant safety 49

thresholds and in certain rollovers (window RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is
curtain air bags and ETDs). as upright as possible.
RNever wear the shoulder belt under your RCheck your seat belt during travel to make
arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. sure it is properly positioned.
In a frontal crash, your body would move RNever place your feet on the instrument

Safety and security


too far forward. That would increase the panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
chance of head and neck injuries. The seat keep both feet on the floor in front of the
belt would also apply too much force to the seat.
ribs or abdomen, which could severely
RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant
injure internal organs such as your liver or
spleen. restraints, toddler restraints, or children in
booster seats, always follow the child seat
Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
manufacturer’s instructions.
section is located as close as possible to
the middle of the shoulder. It should not
touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder G Warning!
portion of the seat belt under your arm. For Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They
this purpose, you can adjust the height of could tear.
the seat belt outlet. Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the
RPosition
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
the lap belt as low as possible on
This could damage the seat belt.
your hips and not across the abdomen. If
the lap belt is positioned across your Never attempt to make modifications to seat
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in belts. This could impair the effectiveness of
a crash. the seat belts.
RNever wear seat belts over rigid or
breakable objects in or on your clothing, Fastening the seat belts
such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as G Warning!
these might cause injuries.
According to accident statistics, children are
RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted safer when properly restrained in the rear
snugly. Take special care of this when seating positions than in the front seating
wearing loose clothing. position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
RNever use a seat belt for more than one children be placed in the rear seats whenever
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt possible. Regardless of seating position,
around a person and another person or children 12 years old and under must be
other objects at the same time. seated and properly secured in an
appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a
restraint, or booster seat recommended for
crash, you would not have the full width of
the size and weight of the child. For additional
the seat belt to distribute impact forces.
information, see “Children in the vehicle”.
The twisted seat belt against your body
could cause injuries. A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
RPregnant women should also always use a are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
lap/shoulder belt. The lap belt portion or the child is not properly secured in the child
should be positioned as low as possible on restraint.
the hips to avoid any possible pressure on
the abdomen.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 50
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

50 Occupant safety

G Warning! X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the


Vehicles with BabySmart™ air bag correct height (Y page 50).
deactivation system, Canada only: Children X If necessary, tighten the lap portion to a
12 years old and under must never ride in the snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up.
front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz All lap/shoulder belts except the driver’s seat
Safety and security

authorized BabySmart™ compatible child belt have special seat belt retractors to
seat, which operates with the BabySmart™ secure child restraints properly. For more
system installed in the vehicle to deactivate information on special seat belt retractors,
the front passenger front air bag when it is see “Infant and child restraint system”
installed properly. Otherwise they will be (Y page 55).
struck by the air bag when it inflates in a To release the seat belt with seat belt release
crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury button ?, see (Y page 51).
will result.
Seat belt outlet height adjustment

X Raising: Slide seat belt outlet height


adjuster ; upward.
Seat belt outlet height adjuster ; engages
in various positions.
X Lowering: Press and hold release
button :.
X With a smooth motion, pull the seat belt out X Slide seat belt outlet height adjuster ;
of seat belt outlet :. downward.
X Place the shoulder portion of the seat belt X Release button : and make sure seat belt
across the top of your shoulder and the lap outlet height adjuster ; engages into
portion across your hips. place.
X Push latch plate ; into buckle = until it
clicks.
Seat belt adjustment function: The seat
belts on both front seats adjust to the
upper body automatically as necessary
(Y page 51).
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 51
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Occupant safety 51

Seat belt adjustment function 6 seconds to remind you and your passengers
to fasten your seat belts.
The seat belt adjustment function adjusts the
seat belts on both front seats to the upper If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened when
body of the respective vehicle occupant. The the engine is started, an additional warning
seat belt will be pulled slightly tighter for that chime will sound. The warning chime goes out

Safety and security


purpose when after approximately 6 seconds or once the
driver’s seat belt is fastened.
Ryou engage the latch plate into the buckle
If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or the
and then turn the SmartKey in the starter
front passenger’s seat belt (with the front
switch to position 2
passenger seat occupied) is not fastened with
Rthe SmartKey in the starter switch is in front doors closed,
position 2 and you then engage the latch Rthe seat belt telltale 7 remains
plate in the buckle
illuminated for as long as either the driver’s
The seat belt adjustment function takes place or front passenger’s seat belt is not
with a certain amount of retracting force fastened.
when the system senses slack between the Rand if the vehicle speed once exceeds
vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt telltale
retain the seat belt during this procedure. You
7 starts flashing and a warning chime
can activate or deactivate the seat belt
sounds with increasing intensity for a
adjustment function via the control system
maximum of 60 seconds or until the
(Y page 138).
driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt are
fastened.
Releasing the seat belts
If you and/or your passenger release the
X Press seat belt release button ? seat belt during driving, the seat belt
(Y page 50). telltale 7 starts flashing and the
Allow the retractor to completely rewind warning chime sounds as described before.
the seat belt by guiding latch plate ; If the driver’s or the front passenger’s seat
(Y page 50). belt remains unfastened after 60 seconds,
! Make sure the seat belt retracts the warning chime stops sounding, the seat
belt telltale 7 stops flashing but
completely. Otherwise the seat belt and/or
latch plate could get caught or pinched in continues to be illuminated.
the door or in the seat mechanism. This can After a vehicle standstill, the warning chime
damage the seat belt and impair its is reactivated and the seat belt telltale
effectiveness, and/or cause damage to the 7 is flashing again if the vehicle speed
door and/or door trim panel. Such damage once exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz The seat belt telltale 7 will only go out if
Limited Warranty. both the driver’s and the front passenger’s
Damaged seat belts must be replaced. seat belt (with the front passenger seat
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle is
Center. standing still and a front door is opened.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
Enhanced seat belt reminder system (Y page 302).
When the engine is started, the seat belt
telltale 7 will always illuminate for

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 52
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

52 Occupant safety

Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD), instructions. These are available at any


seat belt force limiter authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The seat belts for the following seats are The PRE-SAFE® system has electrically
equipped with ETDs and seat belt force operated reversible pre-tensioners that do
limiters: not require replacement after activation.
Safety and security

Rfront seats
Routboard second-row seats Preventive occupant safety (PRE-
Rthird-row seats SAFE®)
The ETDs are designed to activate in the G Warning!
following cases:
The PRE-SAFE® system is intended to reduce
Rin frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding the effects of an accident on vehicle
the system’s preset deployment threshold occupants who are wearing their seat belt
Rin side impacts exceeding the system’s properly. Despite your vehicle being equipped
preset deployment threshold on the far with the PRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of
side of the impact personal injuries occurring as a result of an
Rin accident cannot be eliminated. Therefore,
certain vehicle rollovers
always drive carefully and adjust your driving
Rif the restraint systems are operational and
to the prevailing road, weather, and traffic
functioning correctly, see “SRS indicator conditions.
lamp” (Y page 36)
The ETDs for the front seats will only activate The PRE-SAFE® system takes preventive
if the front seat belts are fastened (latch plate measures to better protect the occupants
properly inserted into buckle). from the possibility of personal injuries in the
following hazardous situations:
The ETDs for the rear outer seats (second-row
Remergency braking maneuvers with the
seats) or rear seats (third-row seats) will
activate with or without the respective seat Brake Assist System (BAS) (Y page 64)
belts fastened. activated
In an impact, the ETDs remove slack from the Rcriticaldynamic driving situations, e.g.
seat belts in such a way that the seat belts fit when the vehicle has been caused to
more snugly against the body. Seat belt force understeer or oversteer because it has
limiters, when activated, are employed to exceeded its physical limitations or in case
help reduce the peak force exerted by the of evasive steering maneuvers at speeds
seat belts on occupants during a crash. above approximately 85 mph (140 km/h)
i The ETDs do not correct an incorrect seat PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures
position or incorrectly worn seat belts. when it is activated:
The ETDs do not pull occupants back RThe front seat belts are pre-tensioned
toward the seat backrest. automatically.
RVehicles with front passenger seat memory
G Warning!
function: If the passenger seat is in an
Pyrotechnic ETDs that were activated must be
unfavorable position, the seat will be
replaced.
adjusted to a position that seeks to better
For your safety, when disposing of the protect the occupant.
pyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safety
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 53
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Occupant safety 53

RIf the vehicle is in a critical dynamic driving


G Warning!
situation, the door windows close, except Do not attach any objects (e.g. hangers) to the
for a minimal gap that remains open. head restraint posts. Otherwise, the NECK-
RVehicles with power tilt/sliding sunroof: If PRO active front head restraints may not be
the vehicle is in a critical dynamic driving able to function properly or offer the intended

Safety and security


situation, the tilt/sliding sunroof also degree of protection they were designed for
closes, except for a minimal gap that in the event of a rear-end collision.
remains open.
G Warning!
If the closing procedure of any of these
elements is blocked, it will stop and open Only use seat or head restraint covers which
slightly. have been tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz for your vehicle model.
Once the hazardous situation no longer exists
and an accident has been avoided, the seat Using other seat or head restraint covers may
belt pre-tensioning is deactivated. All of the interfere with or prevent the activation of the
NECK-PRO active front head restraints and/
PRE-SAFE® settings can be re-adjusted
or the deployment of the front side impact air
following the critical driving event.
bags.
If the seat belts do not release:
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
X Adjust the seat backrest or seat slightly to for availability.
the rear until the seat belt tension is
reduced. When the NECK-PRO active front head
The locking mechanism releases. restraints have been triggered in an accident,
the NECK-PRO active front head restraints
! When moving the seats, make sure there must be reset. Otherwise, the NECK-PRO
are no items in the footwell or behind the active front head restraints cannot offer any
seats. Otherwise, you could damage the additional protection in the event of another
seats and/or the items. rear-end collision.
For information on the seat belt adjustment For information on resetting the activated
function as an integrated comfort feature of NECK-PRO active front head restraints, see
PRE-SAFE®, see (Y page 51). “Resetting activated head restraints”
(Y page 310).
You cannot remove the NECK-PRO active
NECK-PRO active front head front head restraints.
restraints
G Warning!
The NECK-PRO active front head restraints For your protection, drive only with properly
are intended to offer the driver and front positioned head restraints.
passenger increased protection from Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close
whiplash-type injuries. In the event of a rear- to the head as possible and the center of the
end collision, the NECK-PRO active front head head restraint supports the back of the head
restraints on the front seats are designed to at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
move forward in the direction of travel. They injury to the head and neck in the event of an
thus provide the head with increased support accident or similar situation.
earlier on in the collision sequence. The
NECK-PRO active front head restraints will For information on head restraint adjustment,
move forward whether the seats are occupied see “Head restraint height” (Y page 83), or
or not.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 54
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

54 Occupant safety

see “Head restraint fore and aft adjustment” Make sure:


(Y page 83). RYou can reach the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent at the elbows.
RYou can move your legs freely.
Correct driver seat adjustment
RAll displays (including malfunction and
Safety and security

G Warning! indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster


In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle are clearly visible.
control the following must be done before the
vehicle is put into motion:
Seat belt
Rseat adjustment
Rhead restraint adjustment
G Observe Safety notes, see page 47.
XFasten and position your seat belt ;
Rsteering wheel adjustment
correctly (Y page 49).
Rrear view mirror adjustment Make sure:
Rfastening of seat belts RThe seat belt is always fitted snugly.
RAdjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
section is located as close as possible to
the middle of the shoulder.
RPlace the lap portion of the seat belt as low
as possible on your hips.

Seat and head restraint


G Observe Safety notes, see page 81.
XPosition seat = and head restraint
properly. See (Y page 82) for seat and
head restraint adjustment.
Observe the following points:
RAlways be in a properly seated position.
RThe position should be as far rearward from
the front air bag in the steering wheel as
possible, while still permitting proper
operation of vehicle controls.
Steering wheel RAdjust the seat to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach the
G Observe Safety notes, see page 91. accelerator/brake pedal safely.
X Position steering wheel : properly. See RThe seat must be adjusted so that you can
(Y page 92) for manual adjustment and correctly fasten and position your seat belt.
(Y page 92) for electrical adjustment.
RThe seat backrest must be in a position that
is as nearly upright as possible.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 55
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Occupant safety 55

RAdjust the seat cushion so that the front If children open a door, they could injure other
edge of the seat cushion lightly supports persons or get out of the vehicle and injure
your legs. themselves or be injured by following traffic.
RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as Do not expose the child restraint system to
close to the head as possible and the direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s

Safety and security


center of the head restraint supports the metal parts, for example, could become very
back of the head at eye level. hot, and the child could be burned by these
RNever place hands under the seat or near parts.
any moving parts while the seat is being
G Warning!
adjusted.
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger or cargo compartment unless they
are firmly secured in place.
Children in the vehicle
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
Safety notes increases a child’s risk of injury in the event
of
If an infant or child is traveling with you in the Rstrong braking maneuvers
vehicle:
Rsudden changes of direction
X Secure the child using an infant or child
restraint appropriate to the age and size of Ran accident
the child.
X Make sure the infant or child is properly Infant and child restraint systems
secured at all times while the vehicle is in
motion. G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
We recommend all infants and children be
G Warning! properly restrained at all times while the
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the vehicle is in motion.
SmartKey from the starter switch. Always Canada only:
take the SmartKey with you and lock the Only use a BabySmart™ compatible child
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in restraint for the front passenger seat in this
the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child vehicle.
restraint system, or with access to an
All lap/shoulder belts except the driver’s seat
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
belt have special seat belt retractors for
access to a vehicle could result in an accident
secure fastening of child restraints.
and/or serious personal injury. The children
could To fasten a child restraint, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle mounting.
Rbe seriously or fatally injured through To activate the special seat belt retractor:
excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold
X Pull the shoulder belt out completely and
Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with
let it retract.
vehicle equipment that can be operated
even if the SmartKey is removed from the
starter switch or removed from the vehicle,
such as seat adjustment, steering wheel
adjustment, or the memory function

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 56
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

56 Occupant safety

During seat belt retraction, a ratcheting When using any infant restraint, toddler
sound can be heard to indicate that the restraint, or booster seat, make sure to
special seat belt retractor is activated. carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s
The seat belt is now locked. instructions for installation and use.
X Push down on child restraint to take up any Please read and observe warning labels
Safety and security

slack. affixed to the inside of the vehicle and to


infant or child restraints.
To deactivate the special seat belt retractor:
X Release the seat belt buckle and let the G Warning!
seat belt retract completely. According to accident statistics, children are
The seat belt can then again be used in the safer when properly restrained in the rear
usual manner. seating positions than in the front seating
To deactivate the special seat belt retractor position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
for the front passenger seat, the front children be placed in the rear seats whenever
passenger seat must be in the most backward possible. Regardless of seating position,
position. children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appropriate
G Warning! infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster
Never release the seat belt buckle while the seat recommended for the size and weight of
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt the child.
retractor will be deactivated. The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat
i Information on child seats with mounting belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and
fittings for tether anchorages top tether strap, fully in accordance with the
(Y page 57). child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
For information on LATCH-type child seat Occupants, especially children, should always
anchors (Y page 60). sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
The use of infant or child restraints is required properly and use an appropriately sized infant
by law in all 50 states, the District of restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
Columbia, the U.S. territories and all recommended for the size and weight of the
Canadian provinces. child.
Infants and small children should be seated Children can be killed or seriously injured by
in an appropriate infant or child restraint an inflating air bag. Note the following
system. They must be properly secured in important information when circumstances
accordance with the manufacturer’s require you to place a child in the front
instructions for the child restraint. All infant passenger seat:
or child restraint systems must comply with RUSA only: Your vehicle is equipped with air
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards bag technology designed to deactivate the
213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle front passenger front air bag in your vehicle
Safety Standards 213 and 210.2. when the system senses the weight of a
A statement by the child restraint typical 12-month-old child or less along
manufacturer of compliance with these with the weight of a standard appropriate
standards can be found on the instruction child restraint on the front passenger seat.
label on the restraint and in the instruction RUSA only: For children larger than the
manual provided with the restraint. typical 12-month-old child, the front
passenger front air bag may or may not be
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 57
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Occupant safety 57

activated. Always make sure the A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
42 indicator lamp is front passenger seat will be seriously
illuminated, indicating that the front injured or even killed if the front passenger
passenger front air bag is deactivated. front air bag inflates.
RCanada only: Children 12 years old and RIf you have to place a child in a forward-

Safety and security


under must never ride in the front seat, facing child restraint on the front passenger
except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized seat, move the seat as far back as possible,
BabySmart™ compatible child seat, which use the proper child restraint
operates with the BabySmart™ system recommended for the age, size and weight
installed in the vehicle to deactivate the of the child, and secure child restraint with
front passenger front air bag when it is the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child
installed properly. Otherwise they will be seat manufacturer’s instructions.
struck by the air bag when it inflates in a
crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury G Warning!
will result. Infants and small children should never share
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the a seat belt with another occupant. During an
front passenger seat will be seriously accident, they could be crushed between the
injured or even killed if the front passenger occupant and seat belt.
front air bag inflates in a collision which A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
could occur under some circumstances, significantly increased if the child restraints
even with the air bag technology installed are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
in your vehicle. The only means to or the child is not properly secured in the child
completely eliminate this risk is to never restraint.
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint Children too big for a toddler restraint must
in the front seat. We therefore strongly ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position
recommend that you always place a child shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not
in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat. face or neck. A booster seat may be
RIf you must install a rear-facing child necessary to achieve proper seat belt
restraint on the front passenger seat positioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) until
because circumstances require you to do they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt
so, make sure the 42 fits properly without a booster.
indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating When the child restraint is not in use, remove
that the front passenger front air bag is it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat
deactivated. Should the 42 belt to prevent the child restraint from
indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while becoming a projectile in the event of an
the restraint is installed, please check accident.
installation. Periodically check the
42 indicator lamp while Installation of infant and child restraint
driving to make sure the 42 systems
indicator lamp is illuminated. If the
42 indicator lamp goes out or
This vehicle is equipped with tether
anchorages for a top tether strap at each of
remains out, do not transport a child on the
the rear seat backrests. The tether anchorage
front passenger seat until the system has
ring of the second-row middle seat is located
been repaired.
on the rear of the seat base (Y page 59).

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 58
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

58 Occupant safety

Top tether straps enable an additional X Securely fasten hook =, which is part of
connection to be made between child the tether strap ?, to anchorage ring ;.
restraint systems secured with LATCH-type
anchors and rear seats. This can further
reduce the risk of injury.
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
Safety and security

Outboard second-row and third-row seats

i For safety, make sure hook = is attached


to anchorage ring ; beyond the safety
catch, as illustrated.
Make sure
Rtop tether strap ? is not twisted
X Press in lower part of anchorage ring
cover : on the seat backrest on which a Rthe head restraint is installed and
child seat is to be installed. positioned such that top tether strap ?
X Pull on upper part of anchorage ring can pass freely between the head restraint
cover : to remove cover. and top of the seat backrest
X Store anchorage ring cover : in a Rtop tether strap ? is positioned between
convenient place (e.g. glove box). the seat backrest and the cargo
compartment cover blind (if installed)
X Move the respective head restraint to its
Rtop tether strap ? is positioned between
uppermost position (Y page 88).
X Release the respective seat backrest
the seat backrest and the cargo net (if
(Y page 84). installed)
The seat backrest folds down. G Warning!
X Guide the top tether strap between head
When installing a child seat on a third-row
restraint and top of the seat backrest. seat, do not fasten the hook to the strap below
the anchorage ring. Otherwise, the child seat
will not be securely fastened. A child’s risk of
serious or fatal injuries is significantly
increased if the child seat is not properly
secured in the vehicle.

X Fold seat backrest up and push backwards


until it engages audibly.
An outboard second-row seat is locked
properly only when the lock status
indicator is in hinged position and the red
marking is barely visible (Y page 86).
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 59
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Occupant safety 59

G Warning! the seat belt buckle for the second-row


After installing top tether straps, make sure middle seat.
the seats are locked properly, the seat
backrests are in an upright position and they G Warning!
are locked properly. Please be aware that installation of a child

Safety and security


An outboard second-row seat is locked seat in the second-row middle seat position
properly only when the lock status indicator can prevent the folding forward of the
is in hinged position and the red marking is outboard second-row seats which can
barely visible. obstruct access to and exit from the third-row
seats. In case of an accident it will be difficult
If a seat and seat backrest are not locked
for occupants of the third-row seats to leave
properly, the seat could move forward and the
the vehicle. Serious injuries could result.
seat backrest could fold. The child seat would
no longer be supported properly or positioned Install a child seat in one of the outboard
to provide its intended benefit. That could seating positions according to the installation
cause serious or even fatal injuries. instructions if access to the third-row seats is
required.
X Lower the head restraint if necessary
X Move the head restraint to its uppermost
(Y page 88).
Make sure top tether strap ? can pass position (Y page 88).
freely between the head restraint and top
of the seat backrest.
X Install the child restraint system and
tighten top tether strap ? according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
After removing the child restraint system and
top tether strap ?:
X Reinstall anchorage ring cover :.

Second-row middle seat


G Warning! X Pull seat backrest release strap : in the
Only install a child seat in the second-row direction of arrow.
middle seat position if the outboard seat belt
buckle is not obstructed or overlapped by the
child seat. Not all child seats, including some
Mercedes-Benz approved child seats, can be
used in this seating position. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for more
information.
Do not use the LATCH anchors or seat belt
buckle for the outboard seats in conjunction
with a child seat in the second-row middle
seat position. Child seats in the middle
seating position must only be secured by the
middle seat position seat belt inserted into

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 60
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

60 Occupant safety

X Fold seat backrest ; forward to seat no longer be supported properly or positioned


cushion = as far as necessary for you to to provide its intended benefit. That could
access anchorage ring ?. cause serious or even fatal injuries.

X Lower the head restraint if necessary


(Y page 88).
Safety and security

Make sure top tether strap B can pass


freely between the head restraint and top
of the seat backrest.
X Install the child restraint system and
tighten top tether strap B according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

Child seat anchors – LATCH-type


X Guide top tether strap B between head
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
restraint and top of the seat backrest.
X Securely fasten hook A, which is part of G Warning!
top tether strap B, to anchorage ring ?. Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position
Make sure
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not
Rtop tether strap B is not twisted face or neck.
Rthe head restraint is installed and A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
positioned such that top tether strap B proper seat belt positioning for children over
can pass freely between the head restraint 41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height where
and top of the seat backrest a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a
Rtop
booster.
tether strap B is positioned between
the seat backrest and the cargo Install child seat according to manufacturer’s
compartment cover blind (if installed) instructions.
The child seat must be firmly attached to both
Rtop tether strap B is positioned between
anchors.
the seat backrest and the cargo net (if
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
installed)
loose during an accident which could result in
i For safety, make sure hook A is attached serious injury or death to the child.
to anchorage ring ? beyond the safety Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
catch, as illustrated. child seat mounting fittings must be replaced.
X Fold seat backrest up and push backwards Each of the outboard second-row seats and
until it engages audibly. third-row seats has two LATCH-type anchors
for the installation of a LATCH-type child seat
G Warning! with matching mounting fittings.
After installing the top tether strap, make sure
Non-LATCH-type child seats may also be used
the seat backrest is in an upright position and
and can be installed using the vehicle’s seat
is locked properly.
belt system. Install child seat according to the
If the seat backrest is not locked properly, the manufacturer’s instructions.
seat backrest could fold. The child seat would
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 61
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Occupant safety 61

The LATCH-type anchors on the outboard


second-row seats are covered with
upholstery blends.

Safety and security


X Remove anchorage ring covers = from
anchors ? of the third-row seat on which
a child seat is to be installed.
Information sign ; indicates the position of
X Install a LATCH-type child seat according
anchor :.
to the manufacturer’s instructions.
X Move the respective outboard second-row A rigid connection between the child seat
seat backrest to an upright position and the body of the vehicle is established.
(Y page 87).
X Push the upholstery blend to the side. Child safety
X Install a LATCH-type child seat according
to the manufacturer’s instructions. Child safety locks
A rigid connection between the child seat G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
and the body of the vehicle is established.
The LATCH-type anchors on the third-row
G Warning!
seats are blended with covers. Children could open a rear door from the
inside. This may cause serious personal injury
or an accident. Therefore, secure the rear
doors with the child safety locks whenever
children are riding in the back seats of the
vehicle.

The child safety locks on the rear doors


enable you to secure each rear door
individually. You cannot open a secured rear
door from the inside. You can open the rear
door from the outside when the vehicle is
unlocked.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 62
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

62 Panic alarm

The rear door windows can no longer be


operated using the respective switch
located in the rear doors.
You can still operate the rear door windows
using the switches located on the door
Safety and security

control panel of the driver’s door.


X Deactivating: Press override switch :
again.
The switch disengages from its recessed
position back to its original position.
The rear door windows can be operated
X Securing: Press the lever down in direction
again using the respective switch located
of arrow ;.
in the rear doors.
X Check to make sure the child safety locks
For more information on power windows, see
are working properly. the “Controls in detail” section
X Releasing: Press the lever up in direction (Y page 106).
of arrow :.

Override switch Panic alarm


G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
With the override switch you can disable the
rear door window switches in the rear door
panels. This can be useful, for instance, when
you have children riding in the rear passenger
compartment.
G Warning!
Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The
children may otherwise injure themselves,
e.g. by becoming trapped in the rear door
Example illustration: SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
window opening.
X Activating: Press and hold !
button : for at least 1 second.
An audible alarm and flashing exterior
lamps will operate briefly.
X Deactivating: Press ! button : again.

or
X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.
or
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
inside the vehicle.
X Activating: Press override switch :.
The switch engages in recessed position.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 63
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving safety systems 63

i USA only: achieved with winter tires, or snow chains


This device complies with Part 15 of the as required.
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: Safety notes
1. This device may not cause harmful G Warning!

Safety and security


interference, and
The following factors increase the risk of
2. this device must accept any accidents:
interference received, including RExcessive speed, especially in turns
interference that may cause undesired
operation. RWet and slippery road surfaces
Any unauthorized modification to this RFollowing another vehicle too closely
device could void the user’s authority to The driving safety systems described in this
operate the equipment. section cannot reduce these risks or prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
i Canada only: vehicle. They cannot increase braking or
This device complies with RSS-210 of steering efficiency beyond that afforded by
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires
the following two conditions: or the traction afforded.
1. This device may not cause interference, Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
and prevent accidents.
2. this device must accept any The capabilities of a vehicle equipped with the
interference received, including driving safety systems described in this
interference that may cause undesired section must never be exploited in a reckless
operation of the device. or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
Any unauthorized modification to this the user’s safety or the safety of others.
device could void the user’s authority to Always adjust your driving style to the
operate the equipment. prevailing road and weather conditions and
keep a safe distance to other road users and
objects on the street.
Driving safety systems If a driving system malfunctions, other driving
safety systems may also switch off. Observe
Introduction indicator and warning lamps that may come
This section contains information about the on as well as messages in the multifunction
following driving safety systems: display that may appear.
RABS (Antilock Brake System)
RBAS (Brake Assist System) ABS
REBP (Electronic Brake Proportioning)
G Observe Safety notes, see page 63.
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
G Warning!
i In winter operation, the maximum Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steady
effectiveness of most of the driving brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the
systems described in this section is only brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 64
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

64 Driving safety systems

and significantly reduces braking If the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lock
effectiveness. during hard braking, reducing steering
capability and extending the braking distance.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
the brake pressure so that the wheels do not
lock during braking. This allows you to
Safety and security

BAS
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
The ABS is functional above a speed of G Observe Safety notes, see page 63.
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
of road surface conditions. emergency situations. If you apply the brakes
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will very quickly, the BAS provides full brake
respond even to light brake pressure. boost automatically, thereby potentially
The ABS indicator lamp ! indicator lamp reducing the braking distance.
in the instrument cluster comes on when you X Apply continuous full braking pressure until
switch on the ignition. It goes out when the the emergency braking situation is over.
engine is running. The ABS will prevent the wheels from
locking.
Braking When you release the brake pedal, the brakes
At the instant one of the wheels is about to function again as normal. The BAS is then
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the deactivated.
brake pedal. The pulsation indicates that the G Warning!
ABS is in the regulating mode. If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system still
X Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake functions, but without the additional brake
pedal while you feel the pulsation. boost available that the BAS would normally
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure provide in an emergency braking maneuver.
yields the advantages provided by the ABS, Therefore, the braking distance may increase.
namely braking power and the ability to steer
the vehicle.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an EBP
indication of hazardous road conditions and
functions as a reminder to take extra care
G Observe Safety notes, see page 63.
while driving. The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP)
enhances braking effectiveness by allowing
Emergency brake maneuver the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion
of the braking effort in straight-line braking
X Keep continuous full pressure on the brake without a loss of vehicle stability.
pedal.
G Warning!
G Warning! If the EBP malfunctions, the brake system will
If the ABS malfunctions, other driving safety still function with full brake boost. However,
systems such as the BAS or the ESP® are also the rear wheels could lock up during
switched off. Observe indicator and warning emergency braking situations, for example.
lamps that may come on as well as messages You could lose control of the vehicle and
in the multifunction display that may appear. cause an accident.
Adapt your driving style to the changed
driving characteristics.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 65
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving safety systems 65

ESP® Mercedes-Benz Center. You could


otherwise seriously damage the brake
G Observe Safety notes, see page 63. system or the transfer case which is not
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
operational as soon as the engine is running. Warranty.

Safety and security


It monitors the vehicle’s traction (force of
adhesive friction between the tires and the ! Because the ESP® operates
road surface) and handling. automatically, the engine and ignition must
be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
The ESP® recognizes that the vehicle deviates
position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop
from the direction of travel as intended by the
button in position 0 or 1) when the parking
driver. By applying brakes to individual
brake is being tested on a brake test
wheels and by limiting the engine output, the
dynamometer. Such testing should be no
ESP® works to stabilize the vehicle. The
longer than 10 seconds.
ESP® is especially useful while driving off and
Active braking action through the ESP®
on wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP®
may otherwise seriously damage the brake
also stabilizes the vehicle during braking and
system which is not covered by the
steering maneuvers.
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The ESP® warning lamp d in the
instrument cluster comes on when you switch ! The ESP® will only function properly if you
on the ignition. It goes out when the engine use wheels of the recommended tire size
is running. as specified in the “Technical data” section
The ESP® warning lamp d in the of this Operator’s Manual.
instrument cluster flashes when the ESP® is
i The Distronic system and cruise control
engaged.
switch off automatically when the ESP®
G Warning! engages.
Never switch off the ESP® when you see the
ESP® warning lamp d flashing in the Electronic Traction System (4-ETS)
instrument cluster. In this case proceed as
follows:
G Observe Safety notes, see page 63.
The 4-ETS (four-wheel Electronic Traction
RWhen driving off, apply as little throttle as
System) is a component of the ESP®. The
possible.
4-ETS improves the vehicle’s ability to utilize
RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator available traction, especially under slippery
pedal. road conditions by applying the brakes to a
RAdapt your speed and driving style to the spinning wheel. In addition, more power is
prevailing road conditions. transferred to the wheel(s) with traction.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
When you switch off the ESP®, the 4-ETS is
still enabled.
cause the vehicle to skid. The ESP® cannot
prevent accidents resulting from excessive
speed. Switching off the ESP®
G Warning!
! Only conduct operational or performance
The ESP® should not be switched off during
tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
normal driving other than in the
tests are necessary, contact an authorized

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 66
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

66 Driving safety systems

circumstances described below. Disabling


the system will reduce vehicle stability in
driving maneuvers.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
wheel is mounted.
Safety and security

To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch off


the ESP®. This allows the drive wheels to spin
and thus cut into surfaces for better grip, for
example
Rwhen driving with snow chains
X With the engine running, press ESP®
Rin deep snow
switch : until the ESP® warning lamp
Rin sand or gravel d in the instrument cluster comes on.
G Warning! The ESP® is switched off.
Switch on the ESP® immediately if the G Warning!
aforementioned circumstances do not apply When the ESP® warning lamp d is
anymore. Otherwise the ESP® will not illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
stabilize the vehicle when it is starting to skid switched off or is not operational due to a
or a wheel is spinning. malfunction. Vehicle stability in standard
When you switch off the ESP®, driving maneuvers is reduced.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
Rthe ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle road conditions and to the non-operating
Rthe engine output is not limited, which status of the ESP®.
allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut
into surfaces for better grip ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
Rthe 4-ETS will still apply the brakes to a extended period with the ESP® switched
spinning wheel off. This may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Rthe ESP® continues to operate when you
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
are braking
Rthe cruise control or the Distronic system Switching on the ESP®
cannot be activated
X Press ESP® switch : until the ESP®
Rthe cruise control or the Distronic system
switch off if activated warning lamp d in the instrument
cluster goes out.
i When the ESP® is switched off and one or You are now again in normal driving mode
more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP® with the ESP® switched on.
warning lamp d in the instrument
cluster flashes. However, the ESP® will ESP® trailer stabilization
then not stabilize the vehicle.
If the trailer you are towing should begin to
sway, the rig can only be stabilized by
immediately applying the brakes hard.
Steering during this maneuver will not help to
stabilize the rig.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 67
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Anti-theft systems 67

The ESP® will assist you in such situations. In the event that the engine cannot be
The ESP® recognizes when the trailer starts started (yet the vehicle’s battery is
swaying and will apply the brakes to reduce charged), the system is not operational.
the vehicle speed to a non-critical speed that Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
allows the vehicle-trailer combination to Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
stabilize. USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

Safety and security


The ESP® trailer stabilization is functional at
vehicle speeds above approximately 40 mph
Anti-theft alarm system
(65 km/h) when the ESP® is switched on.
Once the alarm system has been armed, a
G Warning! visual and audible alarm is triggered when
The system will not be able to assist when the someone opens
trailer jackknifes
Ra door
Rif the ESP® has switched off due to a
Rthe tailgate
malfunction
Rthe hood
Ron wet or icy roads
Ron
The alarm will stay on even if the activating
roads with slippery surface
element, a door, for example, is closed
Rin sand or gravel immediately.
Trailers with a high center of gravity may tip The alarm system will also be triggered when
over before the system recognizes swaying of Rthe vehicle is opened with the mechanical
the trailer. key
Ra door is opened from the inside
Anti-theft systems To cancel the alarm after it has been
triggered, see “Canceling the alarm”
Immobilizer (Y page 68).
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized i If the alarm stays on for more than
persons from starting your vehicle. 30 seconds, the Tele Aid system initiates a
When leaving the vehicle, always take the call to the Response Center automatically.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The The Tele Aid system will initiate the call
engine can be started by anyone with a valid provided that
SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle. Ryou have subscribed to the Tele Aid
service
Activating
Rthe Tele Aid service has been activated
X With SmartKey: Remove the SmartKey properly
from the starter switch.
Rthe necessary mobile phone, power
X With KEYLESS-GO: Turn off the engine and
supply and GPS coverage are available
open the driver’s door.

Deactivating
X Switch on the ignition.
i Starting the engine will also deactivate
the immobilizer.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 68
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

68 Anti-theft systems

The SmartKey must be within 3 ft (1 m) of


the vehicle.
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle.
Safety and security

X Arming: Lock the vehicle with the


SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
The turn signal lamps flash three times to
indicate that the vehicle is locked. Indicator
lamp : flashes to indicate that the alarm
system is armed.
i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three
times, a door or the tailgate may not be
properly closed.
Close the respective element.
X Disarming: Unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate
that the alarm system is disarmed.
i Unless you open a door or the tailgate
within approximately 40 seconds after
unlocking the vehicle:
RThe vehicle will be locked again.
RThe anti-theft alarm system will be
rearmed.

Canceling the alarm


To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.
X Press button % or & on the
SmartKey.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
X Grasp an outside door handle.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 69
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

69

Vehicle equipment .............................. 70


Locking and unlocking ....................... 70
Starter switch positions ..................... 79
Seats .................................................... 81
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 91
Mirrors ................................................. 93
Memory function ................................. 96

Controls in detail
Lighting ................................................ 97
Wipers ................................................ 103
Power windows ................................. 106
Driving and parking .......................... 110
Automatic transmission ................... 115
Transfer case .................................... 122
Instrument cluster ............................ 122
Control system .................................. 123
Driving systems ................................ 142
Overview of climate control sys-
tem functions and air vents ............. 162
Climate control ................................. 164
3-zone automatic climate control . . . 170
Rear window defroster ..................... 180
Power tilt/sliding sunroof ............... 181
Panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel ...................................... 184
Loading and storing .......................... 186
Useful features ................................. 201
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 70
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

70 Locking and unlocking

Vehicle equipment SmartKey


Your vehicle comes supplied with two
i This Operator’s Manual describes all
SmartKeys, each with remote control and a
features, standard or optional, potentially removable mechanical key.
available for your vehicle at the time of
purchase. Please be aware that your The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
vehicle might not be equipped with all Rthe doors
features described in this manual. Rthe tailgate
Controls in detail

Rthe fuel filler flap


Locking and unlocking
Notes
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
When unlocking the vehicle, all turn signal
lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the
doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system
is disarmed.
When locking the vehicle, all turn signal lamps
flash three times. The locking knobs in the
doors move down. The anti-theft alarm Example illustration: SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
system is armed. : & Lock button
All doors and the tailgate must be closed. ; F Unlock button for tailgate
i If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle = % Unlock button
with the SmartKey, the batteries in the
SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is i USA only:
malfunctioning, or the vehicle battery is This device complies with Part 15 of the
drained. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
RCheck the batteries in the SmartKey and following two conditions:
replace them if necessary. 1. This device may not cause harmful
RUse the mechanical key to unlock the interference, and
driver’s door. 2. this device must accept any
RUse the mechanical key to lock the interference received, including
vehicle. interference that may cause undesired
operation.
RHave the vehicle battery and the vehicle
battery connections checked at an Any unauthorized modification to this
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact
Roadside Assistance or an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 71
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Locking and unlocking 71

i Canada only: KEYLESS-GO


This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come
the following two conditions: with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, each
with remote control and a removable
1. This device may not cause interference, mechanical key.
and The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated into
2. this device must accept any the SmartKey. The validity of the SmartKey is

Controls in detail
interference received, including checked every time you grasp an outside door
interference that may cause undesired handle.
operation of the device. When the SmartKey is valid, your vehicle
Any unauthorized modification to this unlocks
device could void the user’s authority to Rthe doors
operate the equipment.
Rthe fuel filler flap
Factory setting Rthe tailgate
X Global unlocking: Press button %. i USA only:
Unless you open a door or the tailgate within This device complies with Part 15 of the
approximately 40 seconds after unlocking FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
the vehicle: following two conditions:
RThe vehicle will be locked again. 1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
RThe antitheft alarm system will be rearmed.
2. this device must accept any
X Global locking: Press button &. interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
Selective setting operation.
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish Any unauthorized modification to this
to reprogramm the SmartKey. Pressing device could void the user’s authority to
button % will then only unlock the driver’s operate the equipment.
door and the fuel filler flap.
i Canada only:
X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons
This device complies with RSS-210 of
% and & simultaneously for Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
approximately 6 seconds until the battery the following two conditions:
check lamp (Y page 73) flashes twice.
1. This device may not cause interference,
The SmartKey will then function as follows:
and
X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
2. this device must accept any
flap: Press button % once.
interference received, including
X Global unlocking: Press button %
interference that may cause undesired
twice. operation of the device.
X Global locking: Press button &.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 72
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

72 Locking and unlocking

Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO Find the SmartKey or change its present
RYou
location immediately (e.g. place it on the
can also use the SmartKey with
front passenger seat or insert it in shirt
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
pocket).
(Y page 70).
RIf you have started the engine with the
RYou can combine KEYLESS-GO functions
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you can
with normal SmartKey functions (e.g.
turn it off again by
unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and locking
- pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
Controls in detail

with button &).


button
RAlways carry the SmartKey with you.
- inserting the SmartKey into the starter
RNever store the SmartKey together with: switch when the vehicle is at a standstill
- Electronic items such as a mobile phone and the automatic transmission is in park
or another SmartKey position P
- Metallic objects such as coins or metal RThe vehicle could be inadvertently
foil unlocked if the SmartKey is within 3 ft (1 m)
Doing so could impair the function of the of the vehicle and
KEYLESS-GO system. - an outside door handle is splashed with
RTo lock or unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey water
must be located outside the vehicle within or
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or the - you attempt to clean an outside door
tailgate. handle
RWhen the vehicle has been parked for more
RRemember that the engine can be started
than 72 hours, the KEYLESS-GO function is
deactivated. Pull an outside door handle by anyone with a SmartKey that is left
and switch on the ignition once to activate inside the vehicle.
the KEYLESS-GO function. Possibility 1 (One SmartKey in the vehicle,
one SmartKey outside the vehicle):
RIf the SmartKey is positioned farther away
from the vehicle, the system may no longer If you leave the SmartKey behind when
recognize the SmartKey. The vehicle exiting and locking the vehicle, no message
cannot be locked or the engine started via appears in the multifunction display.
the KEYLESS-GO system. Possibility 2 (One SmartKey in the vehicle,
RIf the SmartKey is removed from the vehicle
no SmartKey outside the vehicle):
(e.g. if a passenger exits the vehicle with When exiting and trying to lock the vehicle,
the SmartKey) the message Key Detected In Vehicle
appears in the multifunction display. The
- when pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/
vehicle will not be locked.
stop button or trying to lock the vehicle
with the lock button on an outside door
handle the message Key Not Factory setting
Detected appears in the multifunction X Global unlocking: Grasp an outside door
display handle.
- with the engine running, the red message
Key Not Detected appears in the
multifunction display while driving off
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 73
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Locking and unlocking 73

Unless you open a door or the tailgate within Checking SmartKey batteries
approximately 40 seconds after unlocking
the vehicle:
RThe vehicle will be locked again.
RThe antitheft alarm system will be rearmed.

Controls in detail
Example illustration: SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
X Press button & or % on the
SmartKey.
Battery check lamp : comes on briefly to
X Global locking: Press lock button : on an indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in
order.
outside door handle.
If the battery check lamp does not come on
briefly during check, the SmartKey batteries
Selective setting are discharged.
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish X Replace the batteries (Y page 310).
to reprogram the SmartKey. Grasping the
driver’s outside door handle will then only i You can obtain the required batteries at
unlock the driver’s door and the fuel filler flap. any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons
i If the batteries are checked within signal
% and & simultaneously for
range of the vehicle, pressing button
approximately 6 seconds until the battery & or % will lock or unlock the vehicle
check lamp (Y page 73) flashes twice.
accordingly.
The SmartKey will then function as follows:
X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap: Grasp the driver’s outside door Loss of the SmartKey
handle. If you lose your SmartKey or mechanical key,
X Global unlocking: Grasp any outside door you should do the following:
handle other than the driver’s outside door
X Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
handle.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Global locking: Press lock button : on an
X Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
outside door handle.
mechanical key to your car insurance
company immediately.
X Have the mechanical lock replaced if
necessary.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to supply you with a replacement.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 74
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

74 Locking and unlocking

Opening the doors from the inside turning at vehicle speeds of above 9 mph
(15 km/h). You could therefore lock yourself
You can open a door from the inside even out when the vehicle is pushed or towed or is
when it is locked unless it is secured with the on a test stand.
child safety lock (Y page 61).
Open door only when conditions are safe to i You can also activate or deactivate the
do so. automatic central locking using the control
system (Y page 137).
Controls in detail

Locking and unlocking from the inside


G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
You can lock or unlock the vehicle from the
inside using the central locking switches. This
can be useful, for example, if you want to lock
the vehicle before starting to drive.
The central locking switches do not lock or
Example illustration driver’s door
unlock the fuel filler flap.
The switches are located in each front door.
If the vehicle has previously been locked with
the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening
a door from the inside will trigger the anti-
theft alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, see (Y page 68).
X Front doors: Pull on inside door
handle ; on the respective front door.
If the door was locked, locking knob : will
move up.
X Rear doors: Pull up locking knob on the
respective rear door to unlock door.
X Pull on the inside door handle on the X Locking: Press central locking switch ;.
respective rear door. When all doors and the tailgate are closed,
the vehicle locks.
X Unlocking: Press central unlocking
Automatic central locking switch :.
The doors and the tailgate lock automatically You can open a locked front door from the
when the vehicle is set into motion. inside at any time. Open door only when
You can open a locked front door from the conditions are safe to do so.
inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
The doors are designed to unlock
automatically after an accident if the force of
the impact exceeds a preset threshold.
The vehicle locks automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 75
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Locking and unlocking 75

If the vehicle was previously locked with the Closing the tailgate from the outside
central locking switch
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
Rand the SmartKey is set to factory settings,
the complete vehicle is unlocked when a G Warning!
front door is opened from the inside To prevent possible personal injury, always
Rand the SmartKey is set to selective keep hands and fingers away from the cargo
settings, only the front door opened from compartment opening when closing the
tailgate. Be especially careful when small

Controls in detail
the inside is unlocked
children are around.
If the vehicle has been locked centrally with
the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, it will not
unlock using the central unlocking switch.

Tailgate
G Warning!
Make sure the tailgate is closed when the
engine is running and while driving. Among
other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in
unconsciousness and death.
X Lower tailgate by pulling firmly on
A minimum height clearance of 7.20 ft handles :.
(2.20 m) is required to open the tailgate. X Close tailgate with hands placed flat on it.
Once the tailgate touches the latch, the
Opening the tailgate from the outside tailgate will pull itself shut automatically.

Opening the tailgate from the inside


G Warning!
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle. Children could open the tailgate from
the inside, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.

! Always make sure there is sufficient


overhead clearance.
X Pull on handle :. You can unlock the tailgate from the third-row
In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: The seats and then open it manually.
vehicle must be unlocked.
X Pull tailgate upwards to open.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 76
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

76 Locking and unlocking

In vehicles with power tailgate, you can


Ropen and close the tailgate from the inside
and the outside electrically
Rlimit the opening height of the tailgate
Rinterrupt the opening/closing procedure at
any time by
- pressing or pulling the door-mounted
Controls in detail

remote tailgate opening/closing switch


- pulling the outside handle on the tailgate
X Push handle : in direction of arrow ; and - pressing the tailgate closing switch
hold it there. - pressing the KEYLESS-GO locking/
X From this position, lift handle : in closing switch
direction of arrow = and hold it there. Notes for operating the tailgate with the
The tailgate is released and can be opened SmartKey:
manually.
You can also open, close, and stop the
i If you do not open the tailgate within a few tailgate by pressing button F on the
seconds, the tailgate lock will engage again SmartKey.
automatically. Additionally, the tailgate will The prerequisites for this are:
relock automatically if the vehicle was RNo SmartKey is inserted in the starter
locked when the tailgate was released from switch.
the inside. RKEYLESS-GO: The vehicle’s on-board
If the tailgate lock does not engage electronics must have status 0
automatically and, if applicable, the tailgate (Y page 80).
does not relock after a few seconds, you
have to close the tailgate manually Opening the tailgate from the outside
(Y page 75).
You can unlock and open the tailgate
simultaneously from the outside when the
Power tailgate vehicle is stationary.
X Press and hold button F on the
G Warning!
SmartKey until the tailgate unlocks and
Make sure the tailgate is closed when the begins to open.
engine is running and while driving. Among While the tailgate is opening, an acoustic
other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) warning sounds.
gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in
unconsciousness and death.
or
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Pull on the

! The tailgate swings open upwards handle (Y page 75).


automatically. Always make sure there is
sufficient overhead clearance.
A minimum height clearance of 7.20 ft
(2.20 m) is required to open the tailgate.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 77
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Locking and unlocking 77

Closing the tailgate from the outside


G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
G Warning!
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being
injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from the

Controls in detail
cargo compartment opening when closing the
tailgate. Be especially careful when small
children are around. To stop the closing Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO
procedure, do one of the following:
RPress or pull the remote tailgate opening/ X Press tailgate closing switch : or press
closing switch on the driver’s door. and hold button F on the SmartKey until
RPress
the tailgate begins to close.
the tailgate closing switch.
If the tailgate comes into contact with an
RPress the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing object while closing, the closing procedure is
switch. stopped and the tailgate reopens. This may
RPull outside handle on the tailgate. happen if luggage has been piled too high, for
RWhen no SmartKey is inserted in the starter example.
switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make
sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics Closing the tailgate and locking the
have status 0): Press button F on the vehicle from the outside (vehicles with
SmartKey. KEYLESS-GO)
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
Do not leave the SmartKey in the vehicle. You
may lock yourself out. G Warning!
If the vehicle was previously centrally locked Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, the make sure no one is in danger of being
tailgate will lock automatically when it is injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
closed. The turn signal lamps flash three always keep hands and fingers away from the
times to confirm locking. cargo compartment opening when closing the
tailgate. Be especially careful when small
children are around. To stop the closing
procedure, do one of the following:
RPress or pull the remote tailgate opening/
closing switch on the driver’s door.
RPress the tailgate closing switch.
RPress the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
switch.
RPull outside handle on the tailgate.
RWhen no SmartKey is inserted in the starter
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO
switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make
sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 78
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

78 Locking and unlocking

have status 0): Press button F on the Opening/closing the tailgate from the
SmartKey. inside

You can close the tailgate and lock the vehicle Opening
simultaneously from the outside using the G Observe Safety notes, see page 76.
KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch.
G Warning!
Maintain sight of the area around the rear of
Controls in detail

the vehicle while operating the tailgate with


the door-mounted remote tailgate switch.
Monitor the opening procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being
injured.
To interrupt the opening procedure, press or
pull the door-mounted remote tailgate switch.
When the SmartKey is not inserted in the
starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
X
Make sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics
Make sure you have the SmartKey with you.
have status 0): Press button F on the
X Press KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
SmartKey.
switch : briefly.
The tailgate closes. You can unlock and open the tailgate
Once the tailgate and all doors are closed: simultaneously from the driver’s seat when
RThe vehicle locks. the vehicle is stationary.
RThe turn signals flash three times to
confirm locking.
RThe locking knobs in the doors move
down.
RThe anti-theft alarm system is armed.
If the tailgate comes into contact with an
object while closing, the closing procedure is
stopped and the tailgate reopens. This may
happen if luggage has been piled too high, for
example.
X Pull remote tailgate opening/closing
The closing process is stopped if the system
cannot recognize a SmartKey with KEYLESS- switch : until the tailgate begins to open.
GO anymore. Make sure the SmartKey with While the tailgate is opening, an acoustic
KEYLESS-GO is within approximately 3 ft warning sounds.
(1 m) of the tailgate. Repeat the closing
Closing
procedure if necessary.
The tailgate remains unlocked when a G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recognized G Warning!
inside the vehicle to prevent a possible Maintain sight of the area around the rear of
inadvertent lockout. In this case, the turn the vehicle while operating the tailgate with
signals will not flash and the anti-theft alarm
will be triggered when the tailgate is opened.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 79
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Starter switch positions 79

the door-mounted remote tailgate switch. X Press and hold the tailgate closing switch
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to in the tailgate (Y page 77) until you hear a
make sure no one is in danger of being short acoustic signal.
injured. The opening height of the tailgate is limited.
To interrupt the closing procedure, press or The tailgate will now stop at the stored
pull the door-mounted remote tailgate switch. position when opened.

If the tailgate comes into contact with an Deactivating

Controls in detail
object while closing, the closing procedure is X Press and hold the tailgate closing switch
stopped and the tailgate reopens. This may in the tailgate (Y page 77) until you hear
happen if luggage has been piled too high, for two short, consecutive acoustic signals.
example.
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2. Starter switch positions
X Press remote tailgate opening/closing
SmartKey
switch : until the tailgate begins to close.
While the tailgate is closing an acoustic G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
warning sounds.
X Interrupting the closing procedure:
Press or pull remote tailgate opening/
closing switch :.

Limiting opening height of tailgate


You can limit the opening height of the
tailgate in the upper opening range. This can
be useful, for example, when the space above
the tailgate is not sufficient.
Starter switch
Activating g For removing SmartKey
X Open the tailgate: Pull on handle 1 Power supply for some electrical
(Y page 75) or press and hold button consumers, e.g. radio
F on the SmartKey until the tailgate 2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical
opens. consumers) and driving position
X Stop opening procedure: When the 3 Starting position
tailgate is in the desired position, press
tailgate closing switch (Y page 77) or pull When you switch on the ignition, all lamps
on handle once more. (except low-beam headlamp indicator lamp,
high-beam headlamp indicator lamp, and turn
X You can also press or pull the remote
signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the
tailgate opening/closing switch instrument cluster come on. If a lamp in the
(Y page 78) to stop the opening procedure. instrument cluster fails to come on when the
ignition is switched on, have it checked and
replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the
instrument cluster remains on after starting
the engine or comes on while driving, refer to
“Lamps in instrument cluster” (Y page 299).

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 80
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

80 Starter switch positions

X Always remove the SmartKey from the the SmartKey is in the vehicle, the vehicle’s
starter switch when the engine is not in electrical systems can be switched on or
operation. the engine can be started using the
This will help to prevent accelerated vehicle KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
battery discharge or a completely
discharged vehicle battery.
If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
starter switch, the vehicle battery may not be
Controls in detail

sufficiently charged.
X Check the vehicle battery and charge it if
necessary.
or
X Get a jump start.

i If the SmartKey does not belong to the


vehicle, the SmartKey can be turned in the : KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
starter switch. However, the ignition does ; Starter switch
not switch on and the engine does not start.
X Insert the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
into the starter switch (if not inserted
KEYLESS-GO already).
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55. park position P.
Vehicles equipped with the KEYLESS-GO X Do not depress the brake pedal.
feature are supplied with a SmartKey with
integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a
removable KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button must be
inserted in the starter switch and the
SmartKey present in the vehicle.
Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
without depressing the brake pedal
corresponds to the various starter switch
positions (Y page 79).
Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
with the brake pedal firmly depressed will KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
start the engine (Y page 110). = USA only
The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button can be ? Canada only
pulled out of the starter switch easily. You can
then insert the SmartKey into the starter Position 0
switch.
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
i The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button does button, the vehicle’s on-board electronics
not need to be removed from the starter have status 0 (as with SmartKey removed).
switch when you leave the vehicle.
However, always take the SmartKey with
you when you leave the vehicle. As long as
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 81
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Seats 81

Position 1 Seats
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button Safety notes
once.
This supplies power for some electrical G Warning!
consumers, such as radio functions. In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle
control the following must be done before the
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/
vehicle is put into motion:
stop button

Controls in detail
Rseat adjustment
Ronce more, the ignition (position 2) is
Rhead restraint adjustment
switched on
Rtwice Rsteering wheel adjustment
more the power supply is again
switched off Rrear view mirror adjustment
Rfastening of seat belts
Ignition (or position 2)
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button G Warning!
twice. Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
This supplies power for all electrical Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
consumers. the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
All lamps (except low-beam headlamp Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
indicator lamp, high-beam headlamp backrest in an excessively reclined position as
indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator this can be dangerous. You could slide under
lamps unless activated) in the instrument the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under
cluster come on. If a lamp in the instrument it, the seat belt would apply force at the
cluster fails to come on when the ignition abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
is switched on, have it checked and or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat
replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the belts provide the best restraint when the
instrument cluster remains on after wearer is in a position that is as upright as
starting the engine or comes on while possible and seat belts are properly
driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument positioned on the body.
cluster” (Y page 299).
G Warning!
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/ Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
stop button once, the power supply is again correctly fasten your seat belt.
switched off. Observe the following points:
RAdjust the seat backrest until your arms are
slightly angled when holding the steering
wheel.
RAdjust the seat to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
position should be as far back as possible
with the driver still able to operate the
controls properly.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 82
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

82 Seats

RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
close to the head as possible. The center of restraints. Head restraints are intended to
the head restraint must support the back of help reduce injuries during an accident.
the head at eye level.
RNever place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being Seat adjustment
adjusted. ! When moving the seats, make sure there
Controls in detail

Failure to do so could result in an accident are no items in the footwell or behind the
and/or serious personal injury. seats. Otherwise, you could damage the
seats and/or the items.
G Warning!
The power seats can be operated at any time. Power seats
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked ! When the second-row seats are folded
vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a forward, e.g. for cargo volume expansion,
vehicle could result in an accident and/or the front seats may not be moved to the
serious personal injury. rearmost position. Otherwise you could
damage the front and second-row seats.
G Warning!
According to accident statistics, children are ! When adjusting the seat backrest tilt and
safer when properly restrained in the rear head restraint height, make sure the sun
seating positions than in the front seating visor is folded up. If the head restraint is in
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that the uppermost position, it could hit and
children be placed in the rear seats whenever damage the sun visor.
possible. Regardless of seating position,
i Vehicles without memory function:
children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an The seats can be adjusted within 5 minutes
appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler after either front door has been opened.
restraint, or booster seat recommended for The counter resets each time
the size and weight of the child. For additional Ryou open or close a front door
information, see “Children in the vehicle”. Ryou insert the SmartKey into the starter
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is switch
significantly increased if the child restraints
Ryou remove the SmartKey from the
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
or the child is not properly secured in the child starter switch
restraint. Ryou switch the ignition on or off
Just like in vehicles with memory function,
G Warning!
the power seats can be operated at any
For your protection, drive only with properly time when the ignition is switched on.
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close i The memory function (Y page 96) lets
to the head as possible and the center of the you store the settings for the seat position
head restraint supports the back of the head together with the settings for the steering
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for wheel (electrical) and exterior rear view
injury to the head and neck in the event of an mirrors.
accident or similar situation.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 83
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Seats 83

the lowest non-use position and have the


occupant adjust the head restraint properly.

! Do not attempt to remove front seat head


restraints. They can only be removed by
qualified technicians. We recommend that
you have this work carried out by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Controls in detail
X Seat fore and aft adjustment: Press the
switch forward or backward in direction of
arrow A.
X Seat backrest tilt: Press the switch
forward or backward in direction of
arrow ?.
X Seat height: Press the switch up or down
in direction of arrow =.
X Seat cushion tilt: Press the switch up or X Raising: Adjust the height of head
down in direction of arrow ; until your restraint : by pulling it upward.
upper legs are lightly supported.
If head restraint : is fully retracted, press
X Head restraint height (vehicles with
release button ; in direction of arrow and
memory function): Press the switch up or pull head restraint : upward.
down in direction of arrow :.
X Lowering: Press release button ; in

Head restraint height adjustment, direction of arrow and press down on head
manual restraint :.
This feature is only available in vehicles
Head restraint fore and aft adjustment
without memory function.
G Warning!
G Warning!
Vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment
For your protection, drive only with properly Package: When adjusting the head restraint,
positioned head restraints. make sure your fingers do not become caught
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close between the head restraint cushion and the
to the head as possible and the center of the monitor. Failing to do so may lead to injury.
head restraint supports the back of the head
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
injury to the head and neck in the event of an
accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
restraints. Head restraints are intended to
help reduce injuries during an accident.
With a third-row seat occupied, make sure to
move the respective head restraint up from

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 84
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

84 Seats

Easy-entry feature for third-row seats


The releases for the easy-entry feature are
located on the entry side and the back of each
outboard second-row seat.
Controls in detail

X While seated, reach behind you with both


hands and find lower edge of the head
restraint.
X Push or pull on the lower edge of the head
restraint cushion to the desired position.
X Pull and hold easy-entry lever : in
direction of arrow at resistance point.
Easy-entry/exit feature for third-row The seat backrest folds forward.
seats X Push the seat forward as far as it will go.
This feature allows for easier access to and You should now have sufficient space to
exit from the vehicle’s third-row seats. access the vehicle’s third-row seat.
G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, the second-row
seat backrests must be properly locked either
in the upright position or, when using the
expanded cargo volume, in the fully folded
position while the vehicle is in motion.

! 7-seat vehicles:
Do not use the driver’s side easy-entry/exit
feature for third-row seats when the
second-row middle seat is in armrest Easy-entry/exit position
position. Otherwise, the seat belt outlet of
the second-row middle seat could damage X Enter the vehicle.
the seat backrest of the outboard seat. For information on how to fold down the
second-row seats completely, see
! Vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment “Expanding cargo volume” (Y page 189).
Package:
When using the easy-entry/exit feature, a Easy-exit feature for third-row seats
fully raised head restraint could hit the
The easy-exit straps are located on the rear
monitor when the seat is moving forward.
of each outboard second-row seat base.
Lower the head restraint or hold on to the
seat backrest to prevent damage.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 85
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Seats 85

Rthe outboard second-row seats are


properly locked
Rthe seat backrests of the outboard second-
row seats are in an upright position and are
properly locked
An outboard second-row seat is properly
locked only when lock status indicator : is

Controls in detail
in hinged position and red marking ; is
barely visible.
If a seat and seat backrest are not properly
X To exit the vehicle when seated on a third- locked, the seat could move forward and the
row seat, pull up and hold easy-exit seat backrest could fold. You could slide
strap :. under the seat belt during braking, vehicle
The second-row seat backrest folds maneuvers, or in an accident. If you slide
forward. under it, the seat belt would apply force at the
X Push second-row seat forward a far as it will
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
or even fatal injuries.
go.

Easy-entry/exit position Seat unlocked


X Exit the vehicle. When the seat is unlocked, lock status
For information on how to fold down the indicator : is extended and red
second-row seats completely, see marking ; is clearly visible.
“Expanding cargo volume” (Y page 189). X When the seat is unlocked, push seat
backrest back until the seat audibly
Returning outboard second-row seats engages.
to their original position
G Warning!
When occupants have entered or exited the
vehicle using the easy-entry/exit feature,
before driving off make sure

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 86
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

86 Seats

seating positions than in the front seating


position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
children be placed in the rear seats whenever
possible. Regardless of seating position,
children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an
appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
restraint, or booster seat recommended for
Controls in detail

the size and weight of the child. For additional


information, see “Children in the vehicle”.
Seat locked A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
When the seat is locked, lock status are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
indicator : is in hinged position and red or the child is not properly secured in the child
marking ; is barely visible. restraint.

Rear seat adjustment


Lumbar support
You can adjust the contour of the driver’s seat
G Warning!
lumbar support to help enhance support to Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
your spine. backrest in an excessively reclined position as
this can be dangerous. You could slide under
the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under
it, the seat belt would apply force at the
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat
belts provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and seat
belts are properly positioned on the body.
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten your seat belt.
Never place hands under the seat or near any
moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.
X Curvature position: Use button : to
After adjusting rear seats, make sure
move the curvature up and button = to
Rthe seats are properly locked
move it down.
X Degree of curvature: Use button ; to Rthe seat backrests are in an upright position

lessen the curvature and button ? to and are properly locked


increase it. An outboard second-row seat is properly
locked only when lock status indicator : is
in hinged position and red marking ; is
Rear seats barely visible.
If a seat and seat backrest are not properly
G Warning!
locked, the seat could move forward and the
According to accident statistics, children are
seat backrest could fold. You could slide
safer when properly restrained in the rear
under the seat belt during braking, vehicle
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 87
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Seats 87

maneuvers, or in an accident. If you slide Seat backrest tilt (outboard second-


under it, the seat belt would apply force at the row seats)
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
or even fatal injuries.

Controls in detail
X While seated, pull adjustment handle : in
direction of arrow to resistance point and
Seat locked hold it there.
When the seat is locked, lock status X To move seat backrest back, lean lightly

indicator : is in hinged position and red against the seat backrest.


marking ; is barely visible. X To move seat backrest forward, lean
forward with adjustment handle : pulled
Fore and aft adjustment (outboard and held at resistance point.
second-row seats) The seat backrest will move forward
against your back.
X Release adjustment handle : when the
seat backrest has reached the desired
position.
To make sure the seat backrest has
engaged, lean firmly against the seat
backrest.

Seat backrest tilt (third-row seats)

X Pull up adjustment handle : in direction


of arrow and hold it there.
X Move seat to the desired position.
X Release adjustment handle :.

The seat must engage audibly.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 88
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

88 Seats

X While seated, pull adjustment handle : in X Raising: Manually adjust the height of head
direction of arrow and hold it there. restraint : by pulling it upward to the
X To move seat backrest back, lean lightly desired position.
against backrest. X Lowering: Push release button ; and
X To move seat backrest forward, lean press down on head restraint :.
forward with adjustment handle : pulled.
i The head restraint of the second-row
The seat backrest will move forward middle seat and the third-row seat head
against your back.
Controls in detail

restraints are adjusted in the same


X Release adjustment handle : when the manner.
seat backrest has reached the desired
position. i The tilt of the second-row head restraints
X To make sure the seat backrest has is adjusted in the same manner as the front-
engaged, lean firmly against the backrest. seat head restraints, see “Head restraint
adjustment” (Y page 83).
Head restraint height The tilt of the head restraint of the second-
row middle seat and the third-row seat
G Warning! head restraints cannot be adjusted.
With the second-row middle seat or a third-
row seat occupied, make sure to move the Head restraints, removing and
respective head restraint up from the lowest installing
non-use position and have the occupant
adjust the head restraint properly. G Warning!
For your protection, drive only with properly Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
positioned head restraints. restraints installed when the rear seats are
occupied. Head restraints are intended to
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close
help reduce injuries during an accident.
to the head as possible and the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head With the second-row middle seat or a third-
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for row seat occupied, make sure to move the
injury to the head and neck in the event of an respective head restraint up from the lowest
accident or similar situation. non-use position and have the occupant
adjust the head restraint properly.
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it
is as close to the head as possible and the
center of the head restraint supports the back
of the head at eye level. This will reduce the
potential for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.

i When removing or installing the head


restraint of an outboard second-row seat,
Outboard second-row seat head restraint
adjust the seat to the rear as far as possible
(Y page 87) and fold the seat backrest
(Y page 84) forward.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 89
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Seats 89

X Fold the armrest down to the lowest and


then to the desired position until it
engages.
X To readjust the armrest to a higher
position, move armrest up to the desired
position until it engages.
i To readjust the armrest to a lower

Controls in detail
position, you must first fold up the armrest
again and repeat the steps above.

Seat position for removal of head restraints from 7-seat vehicles


outboard second-row seats You can use the seat backrest of the second-
row middle seat as an armrest for the
Removing
outboard seats.
X Pull head restraint : to its uppermost
position. G Warning!
X Press release button ; and pull out head The folded second-row middle seat is
restraint :. intended to serve as an armrest only. Do not
fold the second-row middle seat and allow
Installing occupants to use the folded second-row
middle seat as a footrest while driving. All
X Insert head restraint : into openings on
vehicle occupants must keep both feet on the
the seat backrest.
floor in front of their seat. Otherwise,
i On the outboard second-row seats, the occupants could slide under the seat belt in a
guide bar with the detent must be on the collision. If occupants slide under it, the belt
left. would apply force at the abdomen or neck.
That could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
X Push head restraint : down until it audibly Do not fold the second-row middle seat and
engages. allow occupants to use the folded second-row
X Push release button ; and adjust head middle seat as a table while driving. Objects
restraint : to the desired position placed on the folded second-row middle seat
(Y page 88). may move freely during braking, vehicle
maneuvers, or an accident and be thrown
i The head restraint of the second-row around in the vehicle interior. Objects thrown
middle seat and the third-row seat head around in the vehicle interior may cause an
restraints are installed in the same manner. accident and/or serious personal injury.

Armrests X Before folding the seat, lower the head


restraint of the second-row middle seat
6-seat vehicles (Y page 88) completely.
The second-row seat armrests can be folded
up, when loading for example, and adjusted.
X Folding up: Move the armrest into a
vertical position until it engages.
X Adjusting: With the armrest folded up,
disengage the armrest by pushing it
towards the rear slightly.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 90
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

90 Seats

X Switch on the ignition.


X Seat cushion depth: Adjust the seat
cushion depth to the length of your upper
leg using switch :.
X Seat backrest contour: Adjust the
contour of the seat backrest to the desired
position using W or X.
X Move the seat backrest support cushion to
Controls in detail

the bottom with button ? or to the center


with button =.
X Pull seat backrest release strap : in X Seat backrest side bolsters: Adjust the

direction of arrow. side bolsters so that they provide good


X Completely fold seat backrest ; forward
lateral support using switch ;.
so that it rests on seat cushion = (armrest
position).
Seat ventilation

Armrest position
The blue indicator lamps ; in seat ventilation
switch : come on to show which ventilation
Multicontour seat level you have selected.
The multicontour seat has a movable seat i The seat ventilation for the driver’s seat
cushion and inflatable air cushions built into can be activated using the summer opening
the seat backrest to provide additional feature (Y page 108).
lumbar and side support.
X Switch on the ignition.
X Switching on: Press respective seat
ventilation switch :.
Three blue indicator lamps ; in seat
ventilation switch : come on.
X Switching off: Press seat ventilation
switch : repeatedly until all indicator
lamps ; go out.
If there is insufficient voltage the seat
ventilating switches off automatically.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 91
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Multifunction steering wheel 91

Seat heating X Continue pressing respective seat heating


switch : until desired seat heating level is
reached.
X Switching off: Press respective seat
heating switch : repeatedly until all
indicator lamps ; go out.
If one or more of indicator lamps ; in
respective seat heating switch : are

Controls in detail
flashing, there is insufficient voltage available
since too many electrical consumers are
turned on. The seat heating switches off
automatically.
Front seat heating switches
The seat heating will switch back on again
The switches for the outboard second-row automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is
seat heating are located in the rear center available.
console.

Multifunction steering wheel


Safety notes
G Warning!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or
driving without the steering wheel adjustment
feature locked could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
Rear seat heating switches The electrical steering wheel adjustment
feature can be operated at any time.
The red indicator lamps ; in front or rear
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
seat heating switch : come on to show in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
which heating level you have selected. vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a
The seat heating switches from level 3 (high) vehicle could result in an accident and/or
to level 2 after approximately 5 minutes. serious personal injury.
The seat heating switches from level 2 to level
Make sure
1 (low) after approximately 10 minutes.
Ryou can reach the steering wheel with your
After approximately 20 minutes in level 1, the
seat heating switches off automatically. arms slightly bent at the elbows
X Switch on the ignition. Ryou can move your legs freely
X Switching on: Press respective seat Rall displays (including malfunction and
heating switch :. indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster
Three red indicator lamps ; in the are clearly visible
respective seat heating switch : come on.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 92
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

92 Multifunction steering wheel

Steering wheel adjustment, manual Easy-entry/exit feature


This feature allows the driver an easier entry
into and exit from the vehicle. When entering
and exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is
in its uppermost position.
The easy-entry/exit feature can be activated
or deactivated in the Comfort submenu of the
Controls in detail

control system (Y page 137).


G Warning!
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
X Unlocking: Pull release handle : out to wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
its stop limit. activated.
X Move steering wheel to the desired To stop steering wheel movement do one of
position. the following:
X Locking: Push release handle : back to RMove steering wheel adjustment stalk.
its original position. RPress one of the memory position buttons.
X Make sure the steering wheel is securely RPress memory button M.
locked by trying to move it up and down as
well as in and out before driving off. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
Steering wheel adjustment, electrical
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.

With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,


the steering wheel will return to its last set
position when you close the driver’s door with
the ignition switched on. The steering wheel
will also return to its last set position when
you insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch or press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button once with the driver’s door closed.
i The last set steering wheel position is
X Adjusting steering wheel in or out: Move stored when the ignition is switched off or
stalk in direction of arrows :. the position is stored in memory
X Adjusting steering wheel up or down: (Y page 97).
Move stalk in direction of arrows ;. With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel tilts upwards when you
i You can store the settings for the steering remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
wheel with the memory function The steering wheel also tilts upwards when
(Y page 96). you open the driver’s door with the SmartKey
in starter switch position 0 or 1 or the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in position 1.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 93
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Mirrors 93

i When the current position for the steering X Switch on the ignition.
wheel is in the uppermost tilt position, the X Switching on: Turn switch at the tip of the
steering wheel will no longer be able to stalk in direction of arrow :.
move upward when the easy-entry/exit Indicator lamp = comes on.
feature is activated.
The adjustment procedure is briefly i The steering wheel heating may be
interrupted when the engine is started. suspended temporarily. However, indicator
lamp = remains on. The steering wheel
G Warning!

Controls in detail
heating is suspended when the
Let the system complete the adjustment temperature of the vehicle interior is above
procedure before setting the vehicle in 86‡ (30†). It is also suspended when the
motion. All steering wheel adjustment must temperature of the steering wheel is above
be completed before setting the vehicle in 95‡ (35†).
motion. Driving off with the steering wheel When these conditions do not apply
still adjusting could cause the driver to lose anymore, steering wheel heating
control of the vehicle. continues.

Crash-responsive exit aid X Switching off: Turn switch at the tip of


stalk in direction of arrow ;.
When you open the driver’s door after an Indicator lamp = goes out.
accident has occurred, the steering column
moves up. The position of the SmartKey in the i Indicator lamp = flashes or goes out in
starter switch is insignificant. This function case of power surge or undervoltage or if
facilitates exiting as well as rescue of vehicle the steering wheel heating malfunctions.
occupants.
The crash-responsive exit aid can only be i The steering wheel heating switches off
triggered when the easy-entry/exit feature is automatically when you remove the
activated via the control system. SmartKey from the starter switch or, on
vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, when you
switch off the ignition and open the driver’s
Heated steering wheel door.
The steering wheel heating warms up the For more information on the steering wheel,
leather area of the steering wheel. see “Multifunction steering wheel”
(Y page 123).

Mirrors
Notes
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a good
view of the road and traffic conditions.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 94
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

94 Mirrors

Interior rear view mirror X Switch on the ignition.


X Press button : for the driver’s side
X Adjust the interior rear view mirror
manually. exterior rear view mirror or button = for
the passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror.
Interior rear view mirror, antiglare The indicator lamp in the respective button
position comes on for approximately 15 seconds.
If you do not make adjustments to the
Controls in detail

selected exterior rear view mirror within


15 seconds, the indicator lamp goes out.
You will then have to select the desired
exterior rear view mirror again before
adjustments can be made. Adjustments
can only be made with the indicator lamp
for the respective exterior rear view mirror
button illuminated.
X Press adjustment button ; up, down, left
or right according to the desired setting.
X Tilt the mirror to the antiglare position by
moving lever : towards the windshield. ! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly
The interior rear view mirror is dimmed. hit from the front, manually snap it back
into place.

Exterior rear view mirrors ! Vehicle with power folding exterior rear
view mirrors:
G Warning! If an exterior rear view mirror housing is
Exercise care when using the passenger-side forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear)
exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from front),
is convex (outwardly curved surface for a press fold button to fold mirrors in, then
wider field of view). Objects in mirror are press fold button again to fold mirrors out.
closer than they appear. Check your interior Do not force mirrors by hand as this may
rear view mirror and glance over your damage the adjustment mechanism.
shoulder before changing lanes. The mirror housing is then properly
positioned and you can adjust the mirror in
the usual manner.

i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior


rear view mirrors will be heated
automatically.

Auto-dimming rear view mirrors


The exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s
side and the interior rear view mirror will
respond automatically to glare when the
ignition is switched on and incoming light
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 95
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Mirrors 95

from headlamps falls on the sensor in the X Shift the automatic transmission into
interior rear view mirror. reverse gear R.
The rear view mirrors will not react if the The passenger-side exterior rear view
automatic transmission is set to reverse gear mirror moves to the preset parking
R or the interior lighting is switched on. position.
X Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear
G Warning! view mirror with adjustment button ; so
The auto-dimming function does not react if that you see the rear wheel and the road

Controls in detail
incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors curb.
in the interior rear view mirror. The exterior rear view mirror parking
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior position is stored.
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not
react, for example, when transporting cargo
Calling up the parking position
which covers the rear window.
Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles X Switch on the ignition.
(incident light) could blind you. As a result, X Press button =, to select the passenger-
you may not be able to observe traffic side exterior rear view mirror.
conditions and could cause an accident. X Shift the automatic transmission into
reverse gear R.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
Exterior rear view mirror parking mirror moves to the stored parking
position position.
For more convenient parking, you can set the The passenger-side exterior rear view mirror
passenger-side exterior rear view mirror so returns to its previously stored driving
that you can see the rear wheel and the road position
curb. R10 seconds after you have put the gear
selector lever out of reverse gear R
Setting and storing the parking position
Rimmediately once your vehicle exceeds a
speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
Rimmediately when you press button : to
select the driver’s side exterior rear view
mirror

Power folding exterior rear view


mirrors
! Before you drive the vehicle through an
automatic car wash, fold in the exterior rear
X Switch on the ignition. view mirrors. Otherwise they may get
X
damaged.
Press button =, to select the passenger-
side exterior rear view mirror.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 96
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

96 Memory function

Folding in and out automatically


The function must be activated in the fold-in
function for the exterior rear view mirrors of
the Convenience submenu (Y page 138).
The exterior rear view mirrors fold in
automatically as soon as the vehicle is locked
from the outside.
Controls in detail

The exterior rear view mirrors fold out


automatically as soon as the vehicle is
unlocked and the driver’s or front passenger
door are subsequently opened. X Switch on the ignition.
X Folding in: Briefly press button :.
Synchronizing
Both exterior rear view mirrors fold in.
The power folding rear view mirrors may have
to be synchronized after the vehicle battery i At speeds above approximately 30 mph
has been disconnected or discharged. If the (47 km/h), you will not be able to fold the
exterior rear view mirrors do not fold properly exterior mirrors in.
upon locking or unlocking the vehicle, do the X Folding out: Briefly press button :.
following: Both exterior rear view mirrors fold out.
X Make sure the power folding function in the
! If an exterior rear view mirror housing is
control system is activated (Y page 138).
forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear)
X When power folding function is
or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the
activated and the exterior rear view front), press button : to fold mirrors in.
mirrors still do not fold properly: Fold Then press button : again to fold mirrors
each exterior rear view mirror in completely
out. Do not force mirrors by hand as this
(Y page 96).
may damage the adjustment mechanism.
X Fold each exterior rear view mirror out
The mirror housing is then properly
completely (Y page 96).
positioned and you can adjust the mirror in
When the exterior rear view mirrors fold the usual manner.
properly upon locking the vehicle, the exterior
Make sure both rear view mirrors are folded
mirrors are synchronized. Otherwise repeat
out before driving off.
the above steps.

Folding in and out manually Memory function


The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if
Notes
they are not folded out completely.
With the memory function you can store up
to three different configurations per front
seat.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 97
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Lighting 97

Each memory position button on the driver’s driver’s side, also wait for the steering
side can store all of the following settings: wheel and exterior rear view mirrors to
RSeat position move to the stored position.
RSteering wheel position i Releasing the memory position button
RExterior rear view mirrors’ position stops movement to the stored positions
immediately.
G Warning!

Controls in detail
Do not activate the memory function while
driving. Activating the memory function while Lighting
driving could cause the driver to lose control Notes
of the vehicle.
i If you drive in countries with left-hand
Each memory position button on the front driving, you must have the headlamps
passenger side can store the setting of the modified for symmetrical low beams.
seat position. Relevant information can be obtained at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i Vehicles equipped with active Bi-Xenon


headlamps:
The active Bi-Xenon headlamps increase
usable illumination over conventional
headlamps because they follow the
curvature of the road ahead. The beams of
the active Bi-Xenon headlamps shift to
either side according to the vehicle’s
steering angle and speed.

Storing positions into memory Exterior lamp switch


X Adjust the seats.
X On the driver’s side, also adjust the
steering wheel and exterior rear view
mirrors to the desired positions.
X Press memory button M once and within
3 seconds press memory position button
1, 2 or 3.
When the settings are stored to the
selected position, an acknowledgement
signal sounds.
1 W Standing lamps, left
2 X Standing lamps, right
Recalling positions from memory
3 $ Off
X Press and hold desired memory position Daytime running lamp mode
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat has moved 4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode
to the stored position completely. On the Daytime running lamp mode

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 98
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

98 Lighting

5 T Parking lamps (also tail lamps, RInstrument panel lamps


license plate lamps, side marker RGreen indicator lamp L in the
lamps and instrument panel lamps) instrument cluster
6 L Low-beam headlamps or high-beam
X Switching off: Turn the exterior lamp
headlamps
switch to position $.
7 N Front fog lamps
8 R Rear fog lamp
Automatic headlamp mode
Controls in detail

i The exterior lamps (except standing The following lamps come on and go out
lamps or parking lamps) go out automatically depending on the brightness of
automatically when you remove the the ambient light:
SmartKey from the starter switch or open RLow-beam headlamps
the driver’s door with the ignition switched
off. RTail lamps
When the parking lamps or the rear fog RParking lamps
lamp are switched on and you remove the RLicense plate lamps
SmartKey from the starter switch and open
RSide marker lamps
the driver’s door, an acoustic signal
sounds.
G Warning!
In addition the message Switch Off
If the exterior lamp switch is set to Ã, the
Lights appears in the multifunction
headlamps will not automatically come on
display.
under foggy conditions.
Switch off the parking lamps or the rear fog
To minimize risk to you and to others, activate
lamp manually.
headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to
! Failure to switch off the parking lamps L when driving or when traffic and/or
when leaving the vehicle may result in a ambient lighting conditions require you to do
discharged battery. so.
In low ambient lighting conditions, only switch
Low-beam headlamps from position à to L with the vehicle
at a standstill in a safe location. Switching
The low-beam headlamps can be switched on from à to L will briefly switch off the
and off with the exterior lamp switch. headlamps. Doing so while driving in low
X Switch on the ignition. ambient lighting conditions may result in an
X Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp accident.
switch to position L. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid
The following lamps come on: to the driver. The driver is responsible for the
RLow-beam headlamps operation of the vehicle’s lights at all times.
RTail lamps X Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp
RParking lamps switch to position Ã.
RLicense plate lamps
RSide marker lamps
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 99
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Lighting 99

The following lamps come on and go out Canada only


depending on the brightness of the ambient With the exterior lamp switch in position
light with the SmartKey in starter switch $ or Ã, you cannot switch on the high-
position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO start/stop beam headlamps.
button pressed once: The high-beam flasher is available at all times.
Rtail lamps X For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp
Rparking lamps switch to position L to permit activation

Controls in detail
Rlicense plate lamps of the high-beam headlamps.
Rside
When the engine is running, and you
marker lamps
Rshift from a driving position to neutral
When the engine is running, the low-beam
position N or park position P with the
headlamps will also come on and turn off
vehicle at a standstill, the low-beam
automatically.
headlamps will go out with a delay of
Canada only: High-beam headlamps are only 3 minutes
available with the exterior lamp switch in
Rturn the exterior lamp switch to position
position L.
T, the low-beam headlamps, the tail
and parking lamps, the license plate lamps
Daytime running lamp mode
and the side marker lamps come on
In Canada, the daytime running lamp mode is Rturn the exterior lamp switch to position
mandatory and therefore in a constant mode. L, the manual headlamp mode has
In the USA, the daytime running lamp mode priority over the daytime running lamp
is deactivated by default. mode
X Activate the daytime running lamp mode The corresponding exterior lamps come on
using the control system, see “Switching (Y page 97).
daytime running lamp mode on or off (USA
only)” (Y page 134). USA only
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position You can only switch on the high-beam
$ or Ã. headlamps in low ambient lighting conditions.
When the engine is running, the low-beam The high-beam flasher is available at all times.
headlamps come on. X For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp
In low ambient lighting conditions, the switch to position L or à to permit
following lamps will come on additionally: activation of the high-beam headlamps.
RTail lamps When the engine is running, and you turn the
RParking lamps exterior lamp switch to position T or
L, the manual headlamp mode has
RLicense plate lamps priority over the daytime running lamp mode.
RSide marker lamps The corresponding exterior lamps come on
With the daytime running lamp mode (Y page 97).
activated and the engine running, you cannot
switch off the low-beam headlamps manually. Fog lamps
Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the
exterior lamp switch in position Ã.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 100
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

100 Lighting

G Warning! Combination switch


In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
only switch from position à to L with
the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from à to L will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions may
result in an accident.
Controls in detail

Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps


and/or the low-beam headlamps on. Fog
lamps should only be used in conjunction with
low-beam headlamps. Consult your State or
Province Motor Vehicle Regulations Turn signals
regarding permissible lamp operation.
X Press the combination switch in direction
X Switch on the ignition.
of arrow ; or ?.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position The corresponding turn signal indicator
T or L (Y page 97). lamp ! or # in the instrument
X Switching on front fog lamps: Pull out the cluster flashes.
exterior lamp switch to first stop. The combination switch resets automatically
The green indicator lamp N in the after major steering wheel movements.
exterior lamp switch comes on.
i To signal minor directional changes such
X Switching on rear fog lamp: Pull out the
as changing lanes, press the combination
exterior lamp switch to second stop.
switch only to point of resistance and
The rear fog lamp, the front fog lamps, the
release. The corresponding turn signal
green and the yellow indicator lamp R
lamps will flash three times.
in the exterior lamp switch come on.
X Switching off front fog lamps/rear fog
High beam
lamp: Push in the exterior lamp switch to
its stop. X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
L (Y page 97).
Locator lighting and night security X Switching on: Push the combination

illumination switch in direction of arrow :.


The high-beam headlamp indicator lamp
Locator lighting and night security K in the instrument cluster comes on.
illumination are described in the “Control
X Switching off: Pull the combination switch
system” section, see “Switching locator
in direction of arrow = to its original
lighting on or off” (Y page 135) and
“Switching night security illumination position.
(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature) on or i Also note the information on high-beam
off” (Y page 135). headlamps with activated automatic
headlamp mode (Y page 98) or the daytime
running lamp mode (Y page 99).
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 101
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Lighting 101

High-beam flasher and


X Switching on: Pull the combination switch Rthe windshield wipers have wiped the
briefly in direction of arrow =. windshield with washer fluid five times
The counter resets when you switch off the
headlamps.
Hazard warning flasher For information on filling up the washer
The hazard warning flasher can be switched reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp

Controls in detail
on at all times, even with the SmartKey cleaning system” (Y page 226).
removed from the starter switch.
The hazard warning flasher comes on
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps
automatically when an air bag deploys.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps
improve illumination of the area in the
direction into which you are turning.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
only operate
Rin low ambient lighting conditions
Rat vehicle speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h)
Rwith the front fog lamps switched off
Rwhen the engine is running
X Switching on: Press hazard warning
flasher switch :. Switching on
All turn signal lamps are flashing.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
i With the hazard warning flasher activated L or Ã.
and the combination switch set for either or
left or right turn, only the respective left or X Activate the daytime running lamp mode
right turn signals will operate when the
(Y page 99).
ignition is switched on.
X Switch on the left or right turn signal,
X Switching off: Press hazard warning depending on whether you are turning left
flasher switch : again. or right.
The respective front fog lamp comes on. If
i If the hazard warning flasher has been
you have switched on the turn signal for
activated automatically, press hazard
one side but turn the steering wheel in the
warning flasher switch : to switch it off.
other direction, the corner-illuminating
front fog lamp on the side of the turn signal
comes on.
Headlamp cleaning system
or
The headlamps will be cleaned with a high- X Turn the steering wheel in the desired
pressure water jet automatically when the direction.
engine is running and you have Driving forward: The front fog lamp on the
Rswitched on the headlamps side of your steering direction comes on.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 102
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

102 Lighting

Driving in reverse: The front fog lamp Interior lighting in the front
opposite to your steering direction comes
on.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
come on automatically depending on the
steering angle, even if you did not switch on
either turn signal. If the corner-illuminating
front fog lamps came on automatically, they
Controls in detail

will also go out automatically depending on


the steering angle and vehicle speed.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps
temporarily come on on both sides of the
vehicle if you turn the steering wheel in one
direction and then again in the other direction
shortly thereafter.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamp
remains lit for a short time only. It then goes
out automatically.

Switching off : p Left front reading lamp on/off


X Switch off the left or right turn signal. ; v Rear interior lighting on/off
or = ~ Automatic control on/off
X Steer straight ahead. ? c Front interior lighting on/off
A p Right front reading lamp on/off
i There may be a brief delay before the
B Front interior lighting
corner-illuminating front fog lamps go out.
C Front reading lamps
D Front interior lighting

Automatic control
X Activating: Press button ~.
Button ~ disengages and sits flush with
the other buttons.
The interior lighting comes on when you
Runlock the vehicle

Rremove the SmartKey from the starter


switch (Interior Lighting Delayed
Shut-off must be switched on
(Y page 136))
Ropen a door
Ropen the tailgate
The interior lighting goes out after a short
time.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 103
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Wipers 103

i If a door remains open, the interior lamps Second-row reading lamps


go out automatically after approximately
5 minutes when the SmartKey is removed
or in starter switch position 0.
X Deactivating: Press button ~.
Button ~ engages.

Controls in detail
Manual control
! An interior lamp switched on manually
does not go out automatically.
Leaving an interior lamp switched on for an
extended period of time with the engine X Switching rear reading lamps on/off:
turned off could result in a discharged Press second-row reading lamp : where
battery. indicated by the arrow.
X Switching front interior lighting on/
Third-row reading lamps and interior
off: Press switch c.
lighting
X Switching rear interior lighting on/off:
Press switch v.
X Switching front reading lamps on/off:
Press respective switch p.

Emergency lighting
The interior lighting comes on automatically
if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
Switching off:
X Press button ~.
: p Right third-row reading lamp on/off
or
; p Left third-row reading lamp on/off
X Press hazard warning flasher switch
= Left third-row reading lamp
(Y page 101).
? Rear interior lighting
or
X
A Right third-row reading lamp
Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey.
i The rear interior lighting is switched on
and off using the button on the front
Interior lighting in the rear overhead control panel (Y page 102).
! An interior lamp switched on manually
does not go out automatically.
Leaving an interior lamp switched on for an
Wipers
extended period of time with the engine Notes
turned off could result in a discharged
battery. ! Do not operate the wipers when the
windshield/rear window is dry. Dust that

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 104
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

104 Wipers

accumulates on a windshield/rear window When you select intermittent wiping, the rain
might scratch the glass and/or damage the sensor is activated. The rain sensor sets a
wiper blades when wiping occurs on a dry suitable wiping interval depending on the
windshield/rear window. If it is necessary wetness of the sensor surface automatically.
to operate the wipers in dry weather
! Do not leave windshield wipers on an
conditions, always operate the wipers with
intermittent setting when the vehicle is
washer fluid.
taken to an automatic car wash or during
windshield cleaning. Windshield wipers will
Controls in detail

operate in the presence of water sprayed


Windshield wipers
on the windshield, and windshield wipers
X Observe notes on page (Y page 103). may be damaged as a result.

Switching on/off ! If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on


the surface of the rain sensor or optical
effects may cause the windshield wipers to
wipe in an undesired fashion. This could
then damage the windshield wiper blades
or scratch the windshield. You should
therefore switch off the windshield wipers
when weather conditions are dry.
X Turn the combination switch to position
Ä or Å.
After the initial wipe, pauses between
wipes are controlled by the rain sensor
Combination switch automatically.
1 $ Windshield wipers off Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the
2 Ä Slow intermittent wiping6 vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is
3 Å Fast intermittent wiping7 opened. This protects persons getting into or
out of the vehicle from being sprayed.
4 ° Slow continuous wiping
Intermittent wiping will be continued when all
5 ¯ Fast continuous wiping
doors are closed and
B í Single wipe/ î Wiping with Rthe automatic transmission is in drive
washer fluid position D or reverse gear R
X Switch on the ignition. or
X Turn the combination switch to the desired Rthe wiper setting is changed using the
position, depending on the intensity of the combination switch
rain.

Intermittent wiping
Only switch on intermittent wiping under wet
weather conditions or in the presence of
precipitation.

6 Rain sensor operation with low sensitivity.


7 Rain sensor operation with high sensitivity.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 105
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Wipers 105

Single wipe 3 Intermittent wiping


X Press the combination switch briefly in 4 Rear window wiper off
direction of arrow B to the resistance 5 Wiping rear window with washer fluid
point.
X Switch on the ignition.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid. X Turn rear window wiper switch : to the
desired position.

Controls in detail
Wiping with washer fluid
X Press the combination switch in direction
of arrow B past the resistance point.
The windshield wipers operate with washer
fluid.
i To prevent smears on the windshield or
noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with Rear window wiper indicator B appears in
washer fluid every now and then even when the lower multifunction display when the rear
it is raining. window wiper is activated.
For information on filling up the washer For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp
cleaning system” (Y page 226). cleaning system” (Y page 226).
For information on cleaning the headlamps
with washer fluid, see “Headlamp cleaning
system” (Y page 101). Problems with wipers
! If anything blocks the wipers (leaves,
snow, etc.), switch them off immediately.
Rear window wiper/washer
For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a
X Observe notes on page (Y page 103). safe location, and
The rear window wiper engages automatically R- remove the SmartKey from the starter
when the automatic transmission is shifted switch
into reverse gear R with the windshield wipers
or
switched on.
- turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and
open the driver’s door (with the
driver’s door open, starter switch is in
position 0, same as with SmartKey
removed from starter switch)
- engage the parking brake
before attempting to remove any
blockage.
RRemove blockage.
Combination switch RTurn the wipers on again.
: Rear window wiper switch
2 Wiping rear window with washer fluid

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 106
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

106 Power windows

If the windshield wipers fail to function at if the switch was pulled past the resistance
all with the combination switch in position point and released, by either pressing or
Ä or Å, pulling the respective switch.
Rset the combination switch to the next The closing of the hinged quarter windows can
higher wiper speed be immediately halted by pressing or pulling
Rhave
the switch.
the windshield wipers checked at
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz If a window encounters an obstruction that
blocks its path in a circumstance where you
Controls in detail

Center
are closing the windows by pressing and
holding button & on the SmartKey or by
Power windows pressing and holding the lock button (vehicles
with KEYLESS-GO) on an outside door handle,
Opening and closing the automatic reversal function will not
operate.
The door windows and the hinged quarter
windows are opened and closed electrically. Activate the override switch when children
The switches for all door windows and the are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The
hinged quarter windows are located on the children may otherwise injure themselves,
driver’s door control panel. The switches for e.g. by becoming trapped in the window
the respective door windows are located on opening.
the front passenger door and the rear doors.
The hinged quarter windows can be operated G Warning!
from the driver’s seat only. Do not keep any part of your body up against
the window pane when opening a window. The
i Operating the rear door windows from downward motion of the pane may pull that
the rear is not possible when you activate part of your body down between the window
the override switch (Y page 62). pane and the door frame and trap it there. If
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55. there is a risk of entrapment, release the
switch and pull it to close the window.
G Warning!
When opening or closing the windows, make i You can also open or close the windows
sure there is no danger of anyone being using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening
harmed by the opening/closing procedure. feature” (Y page 108) and “Convenience
The door windows are equipped with the closing feature” (Y page 108).
express operation and automatic reversal
function. If in express operation mode a door i After switching off the ignition or
window encounters an obstruction that removing the SmartKey from the starter
blocks its path, the automatic reversal switch, you can operate the windows until
function will stop the door window and open you open the driver’s or front passenger
it slightly. door. If no door was opened you can
The door windows operate differently when operate the windows for up to 5 minutes.
the switch is pulled and held. See the “Closing
when a door window is blocked” section in
this chapter for details.
The closing of a door window can be
immediately halted by releasing the switch or,
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 107
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Power windows 107

If the door window is blocked again and opens


slightly:
X Immediately after the door window was
blocked, pull and hold the respective
switch upward until the door window is fully
closed.
The door window closes without automatic
reversal function.

Controls in detail
G Warning!
Pulling and holding the switch to close the
door window immediately after it had been
Door windows
blocked two times will cause the door window
X Switch on the ignition. to close without any reversal function for as
X Opening/closing: Press or pull and hold long as you hold the switch.
switch : to ? to the resistance point.
The corresponding window moves Hinged quarter windows
downward or upward until you release the
X Switch on the ignition.
switch.
X Opening: Press switch A and release.
X Express operation: Press or pull Both hinged quarter windows open
switch : to ? past the resistance point completely.
and release.
X Closing: Pull switch A and release.
The corresponding window opens or closes
completely. Both hinged quarter windows close
completely.
X Stopping during express operation:
Press or pull the respective switch again. i When the obstruction sensor detects that
a hinged quarter windows is blocked during
Closing when a door window is blocked the closing process, they will stop and open
G Warning! slightly.
Make sure that nobody can become trapped X Halting closing process: Press or pull
and be seriously or even fatally injured when switch A once more during the closing
closing a door window with greater force or process.
without automatic reversal function. The hinged quarter windows will stop and
open completely.
If the upward movement of a door window is
blocked during the closing procedure, the i For your safety, the hinged quarter
door window will stop and open slightly. windows cannot be opened again until
X
4 seconds have passed.
Immediately after the door window has
stopped because it was blocked, pull and
hold the respective switch upward until the
door window is fully closed.
Synchronizing door windows
The door window closes with greater force. The door windows must be synchronized after
the battery has been disconnected or if the
door windows cannot be fully closed (express
operation).

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 108
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

108 Power windows

Each door window must be synchronized Vehicles with panorama roof with
separately. power tilt/sliding panel
X Close all doors. When roller sunblinds are extended:
X Switch on the ignition.
X Press and hold button % on the
X Pull and hold switch :, ;, = or ?
SmartKey.
(Y page 107) until the respective door The vehicle unlocks.
window is closed. The windows open and the roller sunblinds
The door window opens again slightly.
Controls in detail

begin to retract after approximately


X Pull and hold the respective switch once 1 second.
more immediately until the door window is X With the windows opened and the roller
closed completely. sunblinds fully retracted, press and hold
X Hold the respective switch for button % on the SmartKey again.
approximately 1 second. The tilt/sliding panel opens.
The door window is synchronized.
X Release button % on the SmartKey to
interrupt the opening procedure.
Summer opening feature When roller sunblinds are retracted:
When the weather is warm, you can ventilate X Press and hold button % on the
the vehicle before driving off by SmartKey.
simultaneously The vehicle unlocks.
Ropening the door windows The windows and the tilt/sliding panel
opens after approximately 1 second.
Ropening the hinged quarter windows X Release button % on the SmartKey to
Ropening the tilt/sliding sunroof interrupt the opening procedure.
Ropening the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel and roller sunblinds
The summer opening feature can only be Convenience closing feature
activated via the remote control of the When locking the vehicle, you can
SmartKey. The SmartKey must be in close simultaneously close
proximity to the driver’s outside door handle. Rthe door windows
X Aim the transmitter eye of the SmartKey at
Rthe hinged quarter windows
the driver’s outside door handle.
Rthe tilt/sliding sunroof
Vehicles without panorama roof with Rthe panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
power tilt/sliding panel panel
X Press and hold button % on the Afterward, you can extend the roller
SmartKey until the windows and the tilt/ sunblinds of the panorama roof with power
sliding sunroof have reached the desired tilt/sliding panel.
position. G Warning!
The vehicle unlocks. When closing the windows and the tilt/sliding
X Release button % on the SmartKey to sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/
interrupt the opening procedure. sliding panel, make sure there is no danger of
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 109
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Power windows 109

anyone being harmed by the closing Vehicles with panorama roof with power
procedure. tilt/sliding panel
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows: When tilt/sliding panel is opened:
RRelease button & to stop the closing X Press and hold button & on the
procedure. To open, press and hold button SmartKey until the windows and the tilt/
%. To continue the closing procedure sliding panel are closed completely.
after making sure that there is no danger of X Press and hold button & on the

Controls in detail
anyone being harmed by the closing SmartKey again.
procedure, press and hold button &. The roller sunblinds extend.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: X Release button & on the SmartKey to

RRelease the lock button on the outside door


interrupt the closing procedure.
handle to stop the closing procedure. When tilt/sliding panel is closed:
RImmediately pull on the same outside door X Press and hold button & on the
handle and hold firmly. The windows and SmartKey until the windows and the roller
the tilt/sliding sunroof or panorama roof sunblinds are closed completely.
with power tilt/sliding panel will open for X Release button & on the SmartKey to
as long as the door handle is held but the interrupt the closing procedure.
door not opened.
With KEYLESS-GO
With SmartKey
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
The SmartKey must be in close proximity to located outside the vehicle within
the driver’s outside door handle. approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door.
X Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey at the X Close all doors.
driver’s outside door handle.
Vehicles without panorama roof with
Vehicles without panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
power tilt/sliding panel
X Press and hold the lock button on an
X Press and hold button & on the outside door handle (Y page 73) until the
SmartKey until the windows and the tilt/ windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof are
sliding sunroof are closed completely. closed completely.
X Release button & on the SmartKey to X Release the lock button on the outside door
interrupt the closing procedure. handle to interrupt the closing procedure.

Vehicles with panorama roof with power


tilt/sliding panel
When tilt/sliding panel is opened:
X Press and hold the lock button on an
outside door handle (Y page 73) until the

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 110
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

110 Driving and parking

windows and the tilt/sliding panel are Starting the engine


closed completely.
X Press and hold the lock button on an G Warning!
outside door handle again. Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your
The roller sunblinds extend. health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
X Release the lock button on the outside door monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
handle to interrupt the closing procedure. unconsciousness and possible death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas (such
Controls in detail

When tilt/sliding panel is closed: as a garage) which are not properly ventilated.
X Press and hold the lock button on an If you think that exhaust gas fumes are
outside door handle (Y page 73) until the entering the vehicle while driving, have the
windows and the roller sunblinds are cause determined and corrected
closed completely. immediately. If you must drive under these
X Release the lock button on the outside door conditions, drive only with at least one
handle to interrupt the closing procedure. window fully open at all times.

Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
Safety notes
G Warning!
Make sure absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
obstacles. If there are any floormats or
carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedals
still have sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission
the objects could get caught between the : Button for selecting park position P
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
j Park position
accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
injury. k Reverse gear
i Neutral position
G Warning! h Drive position
With the engine not running, there is no power
assistance for the brake and steering For more information on how to operate the
systems. In this case, it is important to keep gear selector lever, see “Automatic
in mind that a considerably higher degree of transmission” (Y page 115).
effort is necessary to brake and steer the X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly. park position P.
The transmission position indicator in the
multifunction display should be on P
(Y page 118).
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 111
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving and parking 111

With SmartKey
X Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
X Gasoline engine: Turn the SmartKey in the
starter switch to position 3 (Y page 79) and
release it.
The engine starts automatically.
X Diesel engine: Turn the SmartKey in the

Controls in detail
starter switch to position 2 (Y page 79).
Preglow indicator lamp % in the
instrument cluster comes on. KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
X As soon as preglow indicator lamp % : USA only
goes out, turn the SmartKey in the starter ; Canada only
switch to position 3 and release it.
The engine starts automatically. X Make sure the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button is inserted in the starter switch
i If the engine is at operating temperature, (Y page 80).
preglow indicator lamp % may not stay
on and you can start the engine without i To start the engine with the SmartKey
preglowing. instead of the KEYLESS-GO function,
remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
With KEYLESS-GO from the starter switch. Proceed as
described in “With SmartKey”
G Warning! (Y page 111).
As long as the SmartKey is in your vehicle, the X Depress the brake pedal during the starting
vehicle can be started. Therefore, never leave procedure.
children unattended in the vehicle, as they
X Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
could otherwise accidentally start the engine.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the X Gasoline engine: Press the KEYLESS-GO
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do start/stop button once.
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, The engine starts automatically.
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A X Diesel engine: Press the KEYLESS-GO
child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could start/stop button once.
result in an accident and/or serious personal The engine preglows and starts
injury. automatically.
You can start your vehicle without the i If the engine is at operating temperature,
SmartKey in the starter switch using the the time the engine needs to preglow is
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button. reduced.
The SmartKey must be located in the vehicle.
Starting difficulties
! Remember that extended starting
attempts can drain the battery.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 112
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

112 Driving and parking

The engine does not start. You can hear Driving off
the starter.
There could be a malfunction in the engine G Warning!
electronics or in the fuel supply system. On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
order to obtain braking action. This could
Carry out the following steps:
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
X If you are starting the engine with the control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
SmartKey: Turn the SmartKey in the starter this type of loss of control.
Controls in detail

switch to position 0 and repeat the starting


procedure. ! Do not run a cold engine at high engine
X If you are starting the engine with KEYLESS- speeds. Running a cold engine at high
GO: Close any doors that may be open to engine speeds may shorten the service life
allow for better detection of the SmartKey. of the engine. This is not covered by the
or Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button from the starter switch.
! If an acoustic warning sounds and the
message Release Parking Brake
X Start the engine with the SmartKey as radio
appears in the multifunction display when
signals from another source may be
driving off, you have forgotten to release
interfering with the KEYLESS-GO function.
the parking brake.
X Repeat the starting procedure.
Release the parking brake.
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts: ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may
cause serious damage to the drivetrain
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
Limited Warranty.
The engine does not start. You cannot
! Simultaneously depressing the
hear the starter.
accelerator pedal and applying the brakes
The battery may not be charged sufficiently. reduces engine performance and causes
X Get a jump start (Y page 336). premature brake and drivetrain wear which
If the engine will not start despite a jump is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
start: Limited Warranty.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz i Once the vehicle is in motion, the
Center or call Roadside Assistance. automatic central locking function engages
The starter has been exposed to excessive and the locking knobs in the doors move
temperatures. down.
X Let the starter cool for about 2 minutes. The automatic central locking function can
X Repeat the starting procedure. be switched off(Y page 137).

If the engine does not start after several Automatic transmission


starting attempts:
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz G Warning!
Center or call Roadside Assistance. It is dangerous to shift the automatic
transmission out of park position P or neutral
position N if the engine speed is higher than
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 113
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving and parking 113

idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the Problems while driving
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose The engine runs erratically and misfires
control of the vehicle and hit someone or RGasoline engine: An ignition cable may be
something. Only shift into gear when the damaged.
engine is idling normally and when your right
RThe engine electronics may not be
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
operating properly.

Controls in detail
RGasoline engine: Unburned gasoline may
! Only shift the automatic transmission into
reverse gear R or park position P when the have entered the catalytic converter and
vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the damaged it.
automatic transmission could be damaged. X Give very little gas.
X X Have the problem checked at an authorized
Depress the brake pedal.
The gear selector lever can now be used. Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
position D or reverse gear R.
The coolant temperature is above
248‡ (120†)
i Shifting the automatic transmission out of The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling
park position P is only possible with the the engine.
brake pedal depressed.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon
Without the brake pedal depressed, the
as possible.
gear selector lever can be moved up or
X Turn off the engine immediately.
down. However, the parking pawl remains
engaged, not allowing shifting to occur. X Allow the engine and coolant to cool off.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant if
X Wait for the gear selection process to necessary (Y page 225).
complete before setting the vehicle in
motion.
In case of accident
X If engaged, release the parking brake.
X Release the brake pedal. If the vehicle is leaking fuel:
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. X Do not start the engine under any
After a cold start, the automatic transmission circumstances.
shifts at a higher engine speed. This allows X Exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the
the catalytic converter (gasoline engine) or roadway.
the oxidation catalyst (diesel engine) to reach X Notify local fire and/or police authorities.
its operating temperature earlier.
If the extent of the damage cannot be
For more information on driving, see “Driving determined:
instructions” (Y page 253).
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
If no damage on major assemblies, fuel
system, and engine mount can be
determined:
X Start the engine in the usual manner.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 114
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

114 Driving and parking

Parking automatic transmission out of park position


P, either of which could result in an accident
G Warning! and/or serious personal injury.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system. These materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
Controls in detail

Vehicle movement may result in serious


personal injury or damage to the vehicle or
vehicle drivetrain. Therefore, always do the
following before turning off the engine and
leaving the vehicle:
RKeep right foot on the brake pedal.
REngage the parking brake.
X Releasing: Pull on release handle :.
RShift the automatic transmission into park When the ignition is switched on or the
position P. engine is running, the brake warning lamp
RSlowly release the brake pedal. $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) in
RWhen parked on an incline, always turn the
the instrument cluster goes out.
X Engaging: Step on parking brake
front wheels towards the road curb.
pedal ; firmly.
RTurn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
When the engine is running, the brake
position 0 and remove the SmartKey from
warning lamp $ (USA only) or J
the starter switch, or press the KEYLESS-
(Canada only) in the instrument cluster
GO start/stop button.
comes on.
RTake the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle when leaving.
Turning off the engine
Parking brake
G Warning!
G Warning! Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle
Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle has come to a complete stop. With the engine
is in motion can cause the rear wheels to lock not running, there is no power assistance for
up. You could lose control of the vehicle and the brake and steering systems. In this case,
cause an accident. In addition, the vehicle’s it is important to keep in mind that a
brake lights do not light up when the parking considerably higher degree of effort is
brake is engaged. necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.

G Warning! i If the engine cannot be turned off as


When leaving the vehicle, always remove the described, see “Emergency engine
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with shutdown” (Y page 342).
you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
X Shift the automatic transmission into park
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could position P.
release the parking brake and/or shift the X Engage the parking brake.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 115
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Automatic transmission 115

i Always engage the parking brake in G Warning!


addition to shifting the automatic Keep in mind that turning off the engine alone
transmission into park position P. only will shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N automatically.
i Observe instructions if you want the
automatic transmission to remain in Always shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N, see “Remaining in park position P before turning off the engine.
neutral position N” (Y page 117). Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which

Controls in detail
could result in an accident and/or serious
With SmartKey personal injury.

X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to i In an emergency you can turn off the
position 0. engine while driving by pressing and
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter holding the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
switch. for approximately 3 seconds.
When you turn off the engine using the If you have started the engine with the
SmartKey, and remove the SmartKey from KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and cannot
the starter switch or open a front door, the turn it off as described above:
automatic transmission will shift into park
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
position P automatically.
button from the starter switch.
G Warning! X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.
Keep in mind that turning off the engine alone The engine turns off. The starter switch is
only will shift the automatic transmission into in position 0 (Y page 79).
neutral position N automatically.
Always shift the automatic transmission into
park position P before turning off the engine. Automatic transmission
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which
could result in an accident and/or serious
Introduction
personal injury. For information on driving with an automatic
transmission, see “Driving and parking”
With KEYLESS-GO (Y page 110).
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button. G Warning!
With the driver’s door closed, the starter Make sure absolutely no objects are
switch is now in position 1. With the driver’s obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
door opened, the starter switch is set to Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
position 0, same as the SmartKey removed obstacles. If there are any floormats or
from the starter switch (Y page 79). carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedals
When you turn off the engine using the still have sufficient clearance.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and open a During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
front door, the automatic transmission will the objects could get caught between the
shift into park position P automatically. pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
injury.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 116
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

116 Automatic transmission

! Allow the engine to warm up under low something. Only shift into gear when the
load use. Do not place full load on the engine is idling normally and when your right
engine until the operating temperature has foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
been reached.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an ! Only shift the automatic transmission into
extended period when driving off on reverse gear R or park position P when the
slippery road surfaces. vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the
This may cause serious damage to the automatic transmission could be damaged.
Controls in detail

engine and the drivetrain which is not


covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited ! The vehicle must be stopped when you
Warranty. shift the automatic transmission
Rdirectly between drive position D and
i During the brief warm-up, transmission reverse gear R
upshifting is delayed. This allows the
catalytic converter (gasoline engine) or
Rdirectly between reverse gear R and
oxidation catalyst (diesel engine) to heat up drive position D
more quickly to operating temperature. Rdirectly into park position P
Otherwise the automatic transmission
could be damaged.
Gear selector lever
When trying to free a vehicle stuck in mud or
snow, see “Rocking the vehicle”
(Y page 119).
i Shifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P is only possible with the
brake pedal depressed.
Without the brake pedal depressed, the
gear selector lever can be moved up or
down, but the parking pawl remains
engaged, not allowing shifting to occur.
Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission i The gear selector lever always returns to
: Button for selecting park position P its original position.
j Park position The current transmission position P, R, N,
k Reverse gear or D appears in the multifunction display
i Neutral position (Y page 118).
h Drive position
Shifting into park position P
G Warning! X With the vehicle at a standstill, press
It is dangerous to shift the automatic button : on the gear selector lever.
transmission out of park position P or neutral
position N if the engine speed is higher than SmartKey: When you turn off the engine using
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
the SmartKey, and remove the SmartKey
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
from the starter switch or open a front door,
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
the automatic transmission will shift into park
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
position P automatically.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 117
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Automatic transmission 117

KEYLESS-GO: When you turn off the engine G Warning!


using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and When leaving the SmartKey in the starter
open a front door, the automatic transmission switch, do not leave children unattended in
will shift into park position P automatically. the vehicle. It is possible for children to switch
G Warning! on the ignition which could result in
Keep in mind that turning off the engine alone unsupervised use of vehicle equipment.
only will shift the automatic transmission into Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment could
result in an accident and/or serious personal

Controls in detail
neutral position N automatically.
injury.
Always shift the automatic transmission into
park position P before turning off the engine. With SmartKey:
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which
X Make sure the ignition is switched on.
could result in an accident and/or serious
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
personal injury.
brake pedal and keep it pressed.
i Moving the gear selector lever up or down X Shift the automatic transmission into

shifts the automatic transmission out of neutral position N.


park position P. X Release the brake pedal.
X If engaged, release the parking brake.
Shifting into neutral position N X Switch off the ignition and leave the

X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the SmartKey in the starter switch.
brake pedal. With KEYLESS-GO:
X Move the gear selector lever up or down to X Make sure the ignition is switched on.
the resistance point to select neutral X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
position N.
brake pedal and keep it pressed.
When you turn off the engine, the automatic X Shift the automatic transmission into park
transmission will shift into neutral position
position P.
N automatically.
X Release the brake pedal.
SmartKey: Removing the SmartKey from the
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
starter switch or opening a front door after
turning off the engine will shift the automatic button from the starter switch.
transmission into park position P X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.
automatically. X Switch on the ignition.
KEYLESS-GO: Opening a front door after X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
turning off the engine will shift the automatic pressed.
transmission into park position P X Shift the automatic transmission into
automatically. neutral position N.
Remaining in neutral position N X Release the brake pedal.
X If engaged, release the parking brake.
If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral position N, e.g. when taking X Switch off the ignition and leave the
the vehicle through an automatic conveyor- SmartKey in the starter switch.
type car wash, observe the following
instructions.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 118
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

118 Automatic transmission

Shifting into reverse gear R X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
position D.
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
X Select program mode S.
brake pedal.
X Move the gear selector lever up past the X Do not limit the gear range.

resistance point. X Drive off carefully.

Effect
Shifting into drive position D
B Park position
Controls in detail

X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the Shift the automatic transmission
brake pedal. into park position P only when the
X Move the gear selector lever down past the vehicle is stopped. The park position
resistance point. is not intended to serve as a brake
when the vehicle is parked. Rather,
the driver should always engage the
Shifting procedure parking brake in addition to shifting
The automatic transmission selects individual the automatic transmission into
gears automatically, depending on park position P to secure the
Rthe selected gear range (Y page 119) vehicle.
If the vehicle’s electrical system is
Rthe selected program mode C/S
malfunctioning, the automatic
(Y page 120)
transmission could remain locked in
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal park position P.
Rthe vehicle speed X Have the vehicle’s electrical

With drive position D selected, you can system checked at an authorized


influence transmission shifting by limiting or Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
extending the gear range. possible.
C Reverse gear
Transmission positions Shift the automatic transmission
into reverse gear R only when the
The current transmission position appears in vehicle is stopped.
the multifunction display.

: Transmission position indicator


If the current transmission position does not
appear in the multifunction display due to a
malfunction, for example, make sure that the
automatic transmission is in the desired
position.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 119
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Automatic transmission 119

Effect Rocking the vehicle

A Neutral position Rocking the vehicle by shifting the automatic


transmission directly between drive position
No power is transmitted from the D and reverse gear R can help free a vehicle
engine to the drive axle. When the stuck in mud or snow. The engine control
brakes are released, the vehicle can system of this vehicle electronically limits
be moved freely (pushed or towed). directly shifting the automatic transmission
To avoid damage to the between drive position D and reverse gear R

Controls in detail
transmission, never shift the to very low speeds, i.e. approximately 5 mph
automatic transmission into neutral (9 km/h). To shift the automatic transmission
position N while driving. directly between drive position D and reverse
Exception: If the ESP® is switched gear R, move the gear selector lever up or
off or malfunctioning, shift the down past the resistance point.
automatic transmission into neutral
position N if the vehicle is in danger Working on the vehicle
of skidding.
G Warning!
! Coasting the vehicle, or driving
When working on the vehicle, engage the
for any other reason with the parking brake and shift the automatic
automatic transmission in neutral transmission into park position P. Otherwise
position N can result in the vehicle could roll away which could result
transmission damage that is not in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Towing a trailer
7 Drive position
X When you tow a trailer, shift into a lower
The automatic transmission shifts
gear range manually if the automatic
automatically. All forward gears are
transmission hunts between gears on
available.
inclines.
A lower gear range and reduction of speed
reduces the potential to overload or to
Driving tips
overheat the engine.
Kickdown For more information on trailer towing, see
“Trailer towing” (Y page 256).
Use the kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
X U.S. vehicles: Fully depress the Gear ranges
accelerator pedal.
With the automatic transmission in drive
Depending on the engine speed the
position D, you can limit or extend the gear
automatic transmission shifts into a lower
range, see “One-touch gearshifting”
gear.
(Y page 120).
X Canada vehicles: Depress the accelerator
pedal past the point of resistance.
Depending on the engine speed the
automatic transmission shifts into a lower
gear.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 120
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

120 Automatic transmission

The current gear range appears in the The current program mode appears in the
multifunction display. multifunction display.
Controls in detail

: Gear range indicator : Program mode indicator

Effect You should only change the program mode


when the automatic transmission is in park
= With this selection you can use the position P.
braking effect of the engine. The last selected program mode (C or S) is
5 Allows the use of the engine’s active when the engine is restarted.
braking effect when driving X Press the program mode selector switch
Ron steep downgrades repeatedly until the letter of the desired
program mode appears in the multifunction
Rin mountainous regions display.
Runder extreme operating
Selecting program mode C means:
conditions
RThe vehicle starts out more gentle, both
4 For maximum use of the engine’s forward and reverse, except when driving
braking effect on very steep or off with full throttle.
lengthy downgrades. RTraction and driving stability are improved
on icy roads.
RUpshifts occur earlier even when you give
Automatic shift program
more gas. The engine then operates at
lower revolutions and the wheels are less
likely to spin.
Selecting program mode S means that
upshifts occur later.

One-touch gearshifting
With the automatic transmission in drive
position D, you can limit or extend the gear
range using the steering wheel gearshift
Program mode selector switch control.
C Comfort For comfort driving
S Sport For standard driving
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 121
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Automatic transmission 121

i If you press on the accelerator pedal


when the engine has reached the
revolution limit of the current gear range,
the automatic transmission will upshift
beyond any gear range limit selected.

Canceling gear range limit


X Pull and hold right gearshift control ; until

Controls in detail
the gear range indicator disappears from
the multifunction display.
Steering wheel gearshift control The automatic transmission will shift from
the current gear range directly into drive
i You cannot shift with the steering wheel position D.
gearshift control when the automatic
transmission is in park position P, neutral
Shifting into optimal gear range
position N, or reverse gear R.
X Pull and hold left gearshift control :.
Limiting gear range The automatic transmission will select the
gear range suited for optimal acceleration
G Warning! and deceleration automatically. This will
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in involve shifting down one or more gears.
order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent Emergency operation (limp-home
this type of loss of control. mode)
X Briefly pull left gearshift control :. If vehicle acceleration becomes less
The automatic transmission will shift into responsive or sluggish or the automatic
the next lower gear as permitted by the transmission no longer shifts, the automatic
shift program. This action simultaneously transmission is most likely operating in limp-
limits the gear range of the automatic home (emergency operation) mode. In this
transmission. mode only second gear and reverse gear R
can be selected.
i To avoid overrevving the engine when X Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
downshifting, the automatic transmission X Shift the automatic transmission into park
will not shift into a lower gear if the engine’s
position P.
maximum speed would be exceeded.
X Turn off the engine.

Extending gear range X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting.


X Restart the engine.
X Briefly pull right gearshift control ;.
X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
The automatic transmission will shift into
position D (for second gear) or reverse gear
the next higher gear as permitted by the
R.
shift program. This action simultaneously
extends the gear range of the automatic X Have the automatic transmission checked

transmission. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as


soon as possible.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 122
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

122 Instrument cluster

Transfer case Rwarning/indicator lamps


Rmalfunction/warning messages
The vehicle is equipped with all-wheel drive
Rfailure of any systems
(4MATIC). Both the front and rear axles are
powered at all times when the vehicle is being Driving characteristics may be impaired.
operated. If you must continue to drive, do so with added
! Only conduct operational or performance caution. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such Benz Center as soon as possible.
Controls in detail

tests are necessary, contact an authorized


Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
otherwise seriously damage the brake
system or the transfer case which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.

! Because the ESP® operates


automatically, the engine and ignition must
be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button in position 0 or 1) when the parking
: To dim instrument cluster illumination
brake is being tested on a brake test
dynamometer. Such testing should be no ; Reset button
longer than 10 seconds. = To brighten instrument cluster
Active braking action through the ESP® illumination
may otherwise seriously damage the brake For information on changing the instrument
system which is not covered by the cluster settings, e.g. the language, see
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. (Y page 132).

Instrument cluster Activating the instrument cluster


Introduction The instrument cluster is activated when you
Ropen the driver’s door
For a full view illustration of the instrument
cluster, see “Instrument cluster” Rswitch on the ignition
(Y page 28). Rpress button :, ; or =
G Warning!
i Opening the driver’s door or pressing
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction
button :, ; or = without switching on
display is inoperative. the ignition activates the instrument
cluster illumination only for 30 seconds.
As a result, you will not be able to see
information about your driving conditions,
such as
Rspeed

Routside temperature
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 123
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Control system 123

Adjusting the instrument cluster Control system


illumination
Introduction
X To brighten illumination: Press and hold
button = until the desired level of The control system is activated as soon as the
starter switch is in position 1 (Y page 79).
illumination is reached.
X To dim illumination: Press and hold
The control system enables you to call up
information about your vehicle and to change
button : until the desired level of
vehicle settings.

Controls in detail
illumination is reached.
For example, you can use the control system
i The instrument cluster illumination is to find out when your vehicle is next due for
dimmed or brightened automatically to suit maintenance service, to set the language for
ambient light conditions. messages in the instrument cluster display,
The instrument cluster illumination will also and much more.
be adjusted automatically when you switch G Warning!
on the vehicle’s exterior lamps.
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
i With the exterior lighting switched on, the conditions must always be his/her primary
brightness of the switches in the center focus when driving.
console will also be adjusted when using For your safety and the safety of others,
button : or =. selecting features through the multifunction
steering wheel should only be done by the
driver when traffic and road conditions permit
Resetting trip odometer it to be done safely.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
X Make sure you are viewing the standard
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
display (Y page 126) in the multifunction
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
display.
14 m) every second.
X Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster (Y page 122) until the The control system relays information to the
trip odometer is reset. multifunction display.

Tachometer Multifunction steering wheel


The red marking on the tachometer The displays in the multifunction display and
(Y page 29) denotes excessive engine speed. the settings in the control system are
controlled by using the buttons on the
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, multifunction steering wheel.
as it may result in serious engine damage
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is
interrupted if the engine is operated within
the red marking.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 124
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

124 Control system

Press button briefly


& to move within a menu
* Within Audio/DVD menu to
select previous or next track,
scene or stored station
Within Telephone menu to
switch to the phone book and
Controls in detail

select a name or number

Press and hold button


& Within Audio/DVD menu to
* select previous or next track
with quick search or to select
previous or next station in
station list or wave band
Within Telephone menu to
start the quick search in the
phone book
: Multifunction display
; Press button Press button
6 to answer a call A to turn Voice Control System
off9, see separate operating
to dial8 instructions
to redial8
~ to end a call
Depending on the selected menu, pressing
to reject an incoming call the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel will alter what appears in the
Press button
multifunction display.
W to select submenus in the The information available in the multifunction
X Settings menu display is arranged in menus and
to set values accompanying functions and submenus.
to set the volume The individual functions are then found within
the relevant menu (radio or CD operations
Press button under Audio/DVD menu, for example).
? to turn Voice Control System These functions serve to call up relevant
on9, see separate operating information or to customize the settings for
instructions your vehicle.
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
= Press button functions within each menu, as being
V to select next or previous menu arranged in a circular pattern.
U

8 Function only available in telephone menu.


9 Vehicles without Voice Control System: Button without function.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 125
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Control system 125

X Press button V or U repeatedly to = Transmission position/gear range


pass through each menu one after the indicator
other. ? Automatic transmission program mode
X Press button * or & repeatedly to indicator
pass through each function display, one A Outside temperature or digital
after the other, in the current menu. speedometer
In the Settings menu, instead of functions, For more information on menus displayed in
you will find a number of submenus for calling

Controls in detail
the multifunction display, see “Menus and
up and changing settings. For instructions on submenus” (Y page 126).
using these submenus, see “Settings menu”
(Y page 130).
The number of menus available in the system
depends on which optional equipment is
installed in your vehicle.

Multifunction display

: Trip odometer
; Main odometer

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 126
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

126 Control system

Menus and submenus


Controls in detail

i The headings used in the menus table are Function


designed to facilitate navigation within the
system and are not necessarily identical to E Trip computer menu (Y page 139)
those shown in the multifunction display.
F Telephone menu (Y page 140)
The first function displayed in each menu
will automatically show you which part of
the system you are in.
Standard display menu
Function
: Standard display menu
(Y page 126)
; Audio/DVD menu (Y page 128)
= Navigation menu (Y page 129)
? AIRMATIC/Compass menu Standard display
(Y page 129) In the standard display, trip odometer : and
main odometer ; appear in the
A Distronic menu (Y page 129)
multifunction display.
B Vehicle status message X If you see another display, press button
memory10 menu (Y page 130) V or U repeatedly until the standard
C Settings menu (Y page 130) display appears.
X Press button & or * to select the
D Distance warning function menu
functions in the Standard display menu.
(Y page 138)

10 The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 127
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Control system 127

The following functions are available: The engine should not be operated with a
RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning coolant temperature above 248‡
system (Y page 232) (Canada only) (120†). Doing so may cause serious
engine damage which is not covered by the
RChecking tire inflation pressure with the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Advanced TPMS (Y page 232) (USA only)
RChecking coolant temperature Calling up digital speedometer or
(Y page 127) outside temperature

Controls in detail
RCalling up digital speedometer or outside You can select whether the digital
temperature (Y page 127) speedometer or the outside temperature
RCalling up maintenance service indicator appears in the multifunction display
display (Y page 262) (Y page 133).
G Warning!
Checking coolant temperature The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
G Warning!
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Driving when your engine is overheated can
Indicated temperatures just above the
cause some fluids which may have leaked into
freezing point do not guarantee that the road
the engine compartment to catch fire. You
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
could be seriously burned.
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns which can occur just by opening X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine the digital speedometer or the outside
if you see or hear steam coming from it. temperature appears in the multifunction
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from display.
other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.

X Press button & or * repeatedly until


the coolant temperature appears in the
multifunction display.
Digital speedometer

During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-


and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may
Outside temperature
rise close to 248‡ (120†).
! Excessive coolant temperature triggers a
warning in the multifunction display.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 128
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

128 Control system

Audio/DVD menu X Selecting next or previous stored


station: Press button * or & briefly
The functions in the Audio/DVD menu to select a stored station.
operate the audio or video equipment which
X Selecting next or previous station in the
you have currently switched on.
station list: Press and hold button * or
The following functions are available:
& to select a station.
RSelecting radio station (Y page 128) X Selecting next or previous station in
ROperating audio devices/audio media wave band (Only if no station list is
Controls in detail

(Y page 128) available): Press and hold button * or


ROperating video DVD (Y page 129) & to select a station.
If no audio equipment is currently switched You can only store new stations using the
on, the message AUDIO Off appears in the corresponding feature on the radio. Refer to
multifunction display. separate COMAND system operating
instructions.
Selecting radio station You can also operate the radio in the usual
manner.
The HD Radio with SIRIUS Satellite Radio is
treated as a radio application. Operating audio devices/audio media
For more information on HD Radio with
X Switch on the COMAND system and select
SIRIUS Satellite Radio, refer to separate
COMAND system operating instructions. the audio device or audio media. Refer to
separate COMAND system operating
Additional optional satellite radio equipment instructions.
and a subscription to a satellite radio service
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
provider are required for satellite radio
operation. Contact an authorized Mercedes- the Audio/DVD menu appears in the
Benz Center for details and availability for multifunction display.
your vehicle.
X Switch on the COMAND system and select
radio. Refer to separate COMAND system
operating instructions.
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the currently tuned station appears in the
multifunction display.
Example illustration
: Disc number
; Current track

X Selecting next or previous track: Press


button * or & briefly.
X Selecting a track from the track list
(quick search): Press and hold button
Example illustration
* or &.
: Wave band setting and stored memory
position The current track does not appear during
Audio AUX mode operation.
; Station frequency
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 129
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Control system 129

Operating video DVD Please refer to separate COMAND system


operating instructions for instructions on how
X Switch on the COMAND system and select
to activate the route guidance system.
DVD-Video. Refer to separate COMAND
system operating instructions.
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
AIRMATIC/Compass menu
the Audio/DVD menu appears in the
multifunction display. The AIRMATIC/Compass menu displays the
AIRMATIC messages and the direction into

Controls in detail
which you are currently driving.
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
one of the following messages appears in
the multifunction display.
Vehicles without AIRMATIC:

: Disc number
; Current scene

X Press button * or & to select a


scene.

Vehicles with AIRMATIC:


Navigation menu
The Navigation menu contains the functions
needed to operate your navigation system.
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the Navigation menu appears in the
multifunction display.
The message shown in the multifunction
display depends on the status of the For information on AIRMATIC, see
navigation system: “AIRMATIC” (Y page 153).
RWith the COMAND system switched off, For information on the compass, see
the message NAVI Off appears in the “Compass” (Y page 216).
multifunction display.
RWith the COMAND system switched on Distronic menu
but route guidance not activated, the
direction of travel and, if applicable, the Use the Distronic menu to display the
name of the street currently traveled on current settings for your Distronic system.
appear in the multifunction display. The information shown in the multifunction
RWith
display depends on whether the Distronic
the COMAND system switched on
system is activated or deactivated.
and route guidance activated, the
direction of travel and maneuver Please refer to the “Driving systems” section
instructions appear in the multifunction of this manual (Y page 145) for instructions
display. on how to activate Distronic.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 130
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

130 Control system

Vehicle status message memory For malfunction and warning messages,


menu see “Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display” (Y page 274).
Use the Vehicle status message memory
menu to scan malfunction and warning i After you have scrolled through all
messages that may be stored in the memory. recorded status messages, the first
Such messages appear in the multifunction recorded message appears again.
display and are based on conditions or Should the vehicle’s system record any
system status the vehicle’s system has
Controls in detail

conditions while driving, the number of


recorded. messages will reappear in the multifunction
The Vehicle status message memory menu display when the SmartKey in the starter
only appears if messages have been stored. switch is turned to position 0 or removed
G Warning! from the starter switch. With KEYLESS-GO,
the number of messages will reappear when
Malfunction and warning messages are only
you turn off the engine by pressing the
indicated for certain systems and are
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and open the
intentionally not very detailed. The
driver’s door.
malfunction and warning messages are
simply a reminder with respect to the Except for high-priority messages, the vehicle
operation of certain systems. They do not status message memory will be cleared when
replace the owner’s and/or driver’s you switch off the ignition.
responsibility to maintain the vehicle’s
operating safety. Have all required
maintenance and safety checks performed on Settings menu
the vehicle. Bring the vehicle to an authorized Introduction
Mercedes-Benz Center to address the
malfunction and warning messages. In the Settings menu there are two
functions: The function To reset, press
X Press button V or U repeatedly until reset button for 3 seconds, with which
the Vehicle status message memory you can reset all the settings to the original
menu appears in the multifunction display. factory settings and a collection of submenus
If conditions have occurred causing status with which you can make individual settings
messages to be recorded, the number of for your vehicle.
messages appears in the multifunction The following settings and submenus are
display. available in the Settings menu:
RResetting to factory settings
(Y page 131)
RSubmenus in the Settings menu
(Y page 131)
RInstrument cluster submenu
(Y page 132)
RTime/Date submenu (Y page 133)
X Press button & or *.
The stored messages will now be displayed RLighting submenu (Y page 134)
in the order in which they have occurred. RVehicle submenu (Y page 137)
RComfort submenu (Y page 137)
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 131
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Control system 131

Resetting to factory settings Submenus in the Settings menu


You can reset the settings of all submenus to X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the factory settings. the Settings menu appears in the
For safety reasons, the function Lamp multifunction display.
Circuit Headlamp in the Lighting X Press button &.
submenu cannot be reset while driving. The collection of the submenus appears in
The following message appears in the the multifunction display. There are more

Controls in detail
multifunction display: submenus than can be displayed
Settings simultaneously.
Cannot be
completely reset
to factory settings
when engine is running.
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button X.
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu.
X Scroll down with button X, scroll up
with button W.
X With the selection marker on the desired
submenu, use button & to access the
X Press the reset button in the instrument individual functions within that submenu.
cluster (Y page 122) for approximately X Once within the submenu, use button
3 seconds. & to move to the next function or button
* to move to the previous function
within that submenu.
X Use button W or X to change the
settings of the respective function.
The following lists show what settings can be
changed within the various menus. Detailed
instructions on making individual settings can
X Press the reset button once more. be found on the following pages.
The settings you have changed will not be
Instrument cluster submenu
reset unless you confirm the action by
RSelecting speedometer/odometer display
pressing the reset button a second time. After
approximately 5 seconds, the Settings mode (Y page 132) (Canada only)
menu reappears in the multifunction display. RSelecting digital speedometer display
mode (Y page 132)

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 132
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

132 Control system

RSelecting language (Y page 133) RSelecting language (Y page 133)


RSelecting display (digital speedometer or RSelecting display (digital speedometer or
outside temperature) for status indicator outside temperature) for status indicator
(Y page 133) (Y page 133)

Time/Date submenu Selecting speedometer/odometer


RSetting the time (Y page 133) display mode (Canada only)
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
Controls in detail

RSetting the date (Y page 134)


the Settings menu appears in the
Lighting submenu multifunction display.
RSwitching daytime running lamp mode on X Press button &.
or off (USA only) (Y page 134) X Move the selection marker with button
RSwitching locator lighting on or off W or X to the Instrument
(Y page 135) Cluster submenu.
RSwitching night security illumination X Press button & or * repeatedly until
(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature) on or the message Display Unit
off (Y page 135) Speedometer/Odometer appears in the
RSwitching
multifunction display.
interior lighting delayed shut-off
The selection marker is on the current
on or off (Y page 136)
setting.
Vehicle submenu
RSwitching automatic central locking on or
off (Y page 137)

Comfort submenu
RActivating easy-entry/exit feature
(Y page 137)
RActivating/deactivating seat belt X Press button W or X to set
adjustment feature (Y page 138) speedometer/odometer unit to Km or
RSwitching fold-in function for exterior rear Miles.
view mirrors on or off (Y page 138)
Selecting digital speedometer display
mode
Instrument cluster submenu
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
Access the Instrument Cluster submenu the Settings menu appears in the
via the Settings menu. Use the multifunction display.
Instrument Cluster submenu to change X Press button &.
the instrument cluster display settings.
X Move the selection marker with button
The following functions are available: W or X to the Instrument
RSelecting speedometer/odometer display Cluster submenu.
mode (Y page 132) (Canada only) X Press button & or * repeatedly until
RSelecting digital speedometer display the message Display Unit Digital
mode (Y page 132)
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 133
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Control system 133

Speedometer appears in the multifunction X Move the selection marker with button
display. W or X to the Instrument
The selection marker is on the current Cluster submenu.
setting. X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the message Status Line Display
appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.

Controls in detail
X Press button W or X to set digital
speedometer unit to Km or Miles.

Selecting language
X Press button V or U repeatedly until X Press button W or X to select the
the Settings menu appears in the desired setting.
multifunction display. The selected display is then shown
X Press button &. continuously in the status indicator (lower
X Move the selection marker with button display).
W or X to the Instrument The other display now appears in the
Cluster submenu. Standard display menu (Y page 126).
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the message Language appears in the Time/Date submenu
multifunction display. Access the Time/Date submenu via the
The selection marker is on the current Settings menu. Use the Time/Date
setting. submenu to change the time and date display
settings.
The following functions are available:
RSetting the time (Y page 133)
RSetting the date (Y page 134)
If your vehicle is equipped with the COMAND
system and navigation module, see separate
X Press button W or X to select the COMAND system operating instructions for
language to be used for the multifunction information on how to set the time and date.
display messages. Setting the time
Selecting display (digital speedometer or This function is not available if your vehicle is
outside temperature) for status indicator equipped with the COMAND system and
navigation module.
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button &.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 134
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

134 Control system

X Press button V or U repeatedly until


the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press button &.
X Move the selection marker with button
W or X to the Time/Date submenu.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until Example illustration for setting the month
Controls in detail

the message Clock Set Hour or Clock


X Press button W or X to set the
Set Minute(s) appears in the
multifunction display. month, day, or year.
The selection marker is on the current
setting. Lighting submenu
Access the Lighting submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Lighting submenu
to change the lamp and lighting settings on
your vehicle.
The following functions are available:
RSwitching daytime running lamp mode on
Example illustration for setting the hour
or off (USA only) (Y page 134)
RSwitching locator lighting on or off
X Press button W or X to set the hours (Y page 135)
or minute(s).
RSwitching night security illumination on or
Setting the date off (Y page 135)
This function is not available if your vehicle is RSwitching interior lighting delayed shut-off
equipped with the COMAND system and on or off (Y page 136)
navigation module.
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
Switching daytime running lamp mode on
or off (USA only)
the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display. X Press button V or U repeatedly until

X Press button &. the Settings menu appears in the


multifunction display.
X Move the selection marker with button
X Press button &.
W or X to the Time/Date submenu.
X Move the selection marker with button
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
W or X to the Lighting submenu.
the message Date Set Month, Date Set
Day, or Date Set Year appears in the X Press button & or * repeatedly until

multifunction display. the message Daytime Running Lamps


The selection marker is on the current appears in the multifunction display.
setting. The selection marker is on the current
setting.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 135
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Control system 135

RLicense plate lamps


RSide marker lamps
RFront fog lamps
The locator lighting goes out when the driver’s
door is opened.
If you do not open the driver’s door after
X Press button W or X to switch the unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey, the

Controls in detail
daytime running lamp mode On or Off. lamps will go out automatically after
With daytime running lamp mode switched on approximately 40 seconds.
and the exterior lamp switch in X Press button V or U repeatedly until
position $ or Ã, the low-beam the Settings menu appears in the
headlamps are switched on when the engine multifunction display.
is running. X Press button &.
In low ambient light conditions the following X Move the selection marker with button
lamps will come on additionally: W or X to the Lighting submenu.
RParking lamps X Press button & or * repeatedly until
RTail lamps the message Surround Lighting
RLicense
Function appears in the multifunction
plate lamps
display.
RSide marker lamps The selection marker is on the current
For more information on the daytime running setting.
lamp mode, see (Y page 99).
For safety reasons, changing the setting for
the daytime running lamp mode is not
possible while the vehicle is in motion.
The following message appears in the
multifunction display:
Settings can only be made with
engine off. X Press button W or X to switch the
For safety reasons, resetting all the functions locator lighting function On or Off.
of all submenus to the factory settings while X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
driving (Y page 131) will not deactivate the à when exiting the vehicle.
daytime running lamp mode. The locator lighting feature is activated.
Switching locator lighting on or off
Switching night security illumination
With the locator lighting feature activated, the (Headlamps delayed shut-off feature) on
exterior lamp switch in position à and the or off
interior lighting in automatic mode, the
Use this function to set whether you would
following lamps will come on during darkness
like the exterior lamps to remain on for
when the vehicle is unlocked using button
15 seconds during darkness after exiting the
% on the SmartKey:
vehicle and closing all doors.
RParking lamps

RTail lamps

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 136
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

136 Control system

With the headlamps delayed shut-off feature You can temporarily deactivate the
activated and the exterior lamp switch in headlamps delayed shut-off feature:
position à before the engine is turned off, X Before exiting the vehicle, turn the
the following lamps will come on when the SmartKey in the starter switch to position
engine is turned off: 0.
RParking lamps X Then turn it to position 2 and back to
RTail lamps position 0.
The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is
Controls in detail

RLicense plate lamps


deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as
RSide marker lamps you start the engine.
RFront fog lamps
Switching interior lighting delayed shut-
If, after turning off the engine, you do not off on or off
open a door or do not close an opened door, Use this function to set whether you would
the lamps will automatically go out after like the interior lighting to remain on for
60 seconds. 10 seconds during darkness after you have
X Press button V or U repeatedly until removed the SmartKey from the starter
the Settings menu appears in the switch.
multifunction display. X Press button V or U repeatedly until
X Press button &. the Settings menu appears in the
X Move the selection marker with button multifunction display.
W or X to the Lighting submenu. X Press button &.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until X Move the selection marker with button
the message Headlamp Delayed Shut- W or X to the Lighting submenu.
off appears in the multifunction display. X Press button & or * repeatedly until
The selection marker is on the current the message Interior Lighting
setting. Delayed Shut-off appears in the
multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.

X Press button W or X to switch the


headlamps delayed shut-off feature On or
Off.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position X Press button W or X to switch the
à before turning off the engine. interior lighting delayed shut-off feature
The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is On or Off.
activated.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 137
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Control system 137

Vehicle submenu The following functions are available:


Access the Vehicle submenu via the RActivating easy-entry/exit feature
Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu (Y page 137)
to set the automatic central locking. RActivating/deactivating the seat belt
adjustment feature (Y page 138)
Switching automatic central locking on or
off RSwitching fold-in function for exterior rear
Use this function to switch the automatic view mirrors on or off (Y page 138)

Controls in detail
central locking on or off. With the automatic
Activating easy-entry/exit feature
central locking activated, the vehicle is
locked centrally at a vehicle speed of Use this function to activate and deactivate
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). the easy-entry/exit feature (Y page 92).
X Press button V or U repeatedly until G Warning!
the Settings menu appears in the You must make sure no one can become
multifunction display. trapped or injured by the moving steering
X Press button &. wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
X Move the selection marker with button activated.
W or X to the Vehicle submenu. To stop steering wheel movement do one of
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the following:
the message Automatic Door Locking RMove steering wheel adjustment stalk.
appears in the multifunction display. RPress one of the memory position buttons.
The selection marker is on the current
RPress memory button M.
setting.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.

X Press button V or U repeatedly until


X Press button W or X to switch the the Settings menu appears in the
automatic central locking On or Off. multifunction display.
X Press button &.
Comfort submenu X Move the selection marker with button

Access the Comfort submenu via the W or X to the Comfort submenu.


Settings menu. X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the message Easy-entry Function
appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 138
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

138 Control system

Switching fold-in function for exterior


rear view mirrors on or off
Use this function to set the exterior rear view
mirrors to be folded in automatically when
you lock your vehicle.
With this function set to On and the exterior
rear view mirrors folded in using the button
X Press button W or X to activate (On) on the door control panel (Y page 95), the
Controls in detail

or deactivate (Off) the easy-entry/exit exterior rear view mirrors will not fold out
feature. when you switch on the ignition. You will then
have to fold out the exterior rear view mirrors
Activating/deactivating seat belt using the button on the door control panel
adjustment feature (Y page 95).
Use this feature to set the seat belts to be Make sure both exterior rear view mirrors are
adjusted automatically with the driver’s or folded out completely before driving off.
front passenger seat belt fastened and the X Press button V or U repeatedly until
starter switch in position 2.
the Settings menu appears in the
For more information on the seat belt multifunction display.
adjustment feature, see (Y page 51). X Press button &.
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
X Move the selection marker with button
the Settings menu appears in the W or X to the Comfort submenu.
multifunction display.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
X Press button &.
the message Fold In Mirrors When
X Move the selection marker with button
Locking appears in the multifunction
W or X to the Comfort submenu. display.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until The selection marker is on the current
the message Belt Adjustment appears in setting.
the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.

X Press button W or X to switch the


function On or Off.

X Press button W or X to active (On) or


deactivate (Off) the seat belt adjustment Distance warning function
feature.
In vehicles equipped with Distronic, you can
determine whether the distance warning
function is to be enabled or disabled. With this
function set to On, the system will alert you
when recognizing a stationary obstacle or a
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 139
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Control system 139

slower vehicle moving in your vehicle’s path RDistance to empty (Y page 140)
and the danger of a collision exists, even RCurrent fuel consumption (Y page 140)
when the Distronic is switched off.
When you enter the Trip computer menu,
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
you will always see the fuel consumption
the message Distance Warning appears statistics since start first.
in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
Fuel consumption statistics since start
setting.

Controls in detail
X Press button U or V repeatedly until
the message From Start appears in the
multifunction display.

X Press button W or X to switch the


distance warning function On or Off.
: Distance driven since start
; Time elapsed since start
= Average speed since start
? Average fuel consumption since start
All statistics stored since the last engine start
will be reset approximately 4 hours after the
: Symbol for activated distance warning SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to
function position 0 or removed from the starter switch.
If the distance warning function is switched Resetting will not occur if you turn the
on you will see the symbol Ä in the SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this
Standard display. When the distance warning time period.
function is switched off the symbol Ä will
not appear. Fuel consumption statistics since last
reset
X Press button U or V repeatedly until
Trip computer menu
the message From Start appears in the
Use the Trip computer menu to call up multifunction display.
statistical data on your vehicle. X Press button & or * repeatedly until
The following information is available: the message From Reset appears in the
RFuel consumption statistics since start multifunction display.
(Y page 139)
RFuel consumption statistics since last reset
(Y page 139)
RResetting fuel consumption statistics
(Y page 140)

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 140
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

140 Control system

: Distance driven since last reset


Controls in detail

; Time elapsed since last reset Current fuel consumption


= Average speed since last reset X Press button U or V repeatedly until
? Average fuel consumption since last reset the message From Start appears in the
multifunction display.
Resetting fuel consumption statistics X Press button & or * repeatedly until

X
the message Consumption appears in the
Press button U or V repeatedly until
multifunction display.
the message From Start appears in the
The current fuel consumption appears in
multifunction display.
the multifunction display.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the reading that you want to reset appears
in the multifunction display.
X Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster until the respective
values are reset to 0.
The fuel consumption statistics reset
automatically to 0 after 99 999 miles or
9 999 hours, whichever occurs first.
Telephone menu
Distance to empty
G Warning!
X Press button U or V repeatedly until A driver’s attention to the road must always
the message From Start appears in the be his/her primary focus when driving. For
multifunction display. your safety and the safety of others, we
X Press button & or * repeatedly until recommend that you pull over to a safe
the message Range: appears in the location and stop before placing or taking a
multifunction display. telephone call. If you choose to use the
The calculated remaining driving range telephone while driving, please use the hands-
based on the current fuel tank level free device and only use the telephone when
appears in the multifunction display. weather, road and traffic conditions permit.
If only very little fuel is left in the tank, a Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
vehicle at the fuel pump C appears using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.
instead of the remaining driving range. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.

You can connect your telephone to the


COMAND system via Bluetooth®, see
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 141
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Control system 141

separate COMAND system operating Dialing a number from the phone book
instructions.
When your telephone is ready to receive calls,
X Switch on the COMAND system. you may select and dial a number from the
Refer to separate COMAND system phone book at any time.
operating instructions. X Press button U or V repeatedly until
X Press button U or V repeatedly until the message TEL appears in the
the message TEL appears in the multifunction display.
multifunction display.

Controls in detail
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
One of the following messages will appear the desired name appears in the
in the multifunction display: multifunction display.
RNo Service: No network is available.
If you press and hold button & or
RBluetooth Ready: The telephone has * for longer than 1 second, the system
not been connected to the COMAND scrolls rapidly through the list of names
system via Bluetooth® yet. until you release the button again.
X Connect the telephone to the The stored names are displayed in
COMAND system via Bluetooth®. alphabetical order.
RReady or name of the network provider
(if available): The telephone has found a
network and is ready for use. You can
operate it using the control system.

Answering a call
: Selected name from the phone book
When your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you can answer a call at any time. In the X Press button 6.
multifunction display you will then see the The control system dials the selected
following message, or if available, the caller phone number.
ID (number or name):
If the connection is successful and this
feature is supported by your network
provider, the name of the party (if stored in
your phone book) you are calling will
appear in the multifunction display.
The control system stores the dialed
number in the redial memory.
or
X Press button 6. X Press button ~ if you do not want to
You have answered the call. make the call.

Ending a call or rejecting an incoming


call
X Press button ~.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 142
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

142 Driving systems

Redialing Cruise control


The control system stores the most recently The cruise control maintains the speed you
dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the set for your vehicle automatically.
need to search through your entire phone The use of the cruise control is recommended
book. for driving at a constant speed for extended
X Press button U or V repeatedly until periods of time.
the message TEL appears in the The currently set speed or last set speed
Controls in detail

multifunction display. (“Resume” function) appears in the status


X Press button 6. indicator of the multifunction display:
The first number in the redial memory RUSA only: e.g. Cruise 55 Miles
appears in the multifunction display.
RCanada only: e.g. ¯ 90 Km/h
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the desired number or name appears in the G Warning!
multifunction display. The cruise control is a convenience system
X Press button 6. designed to assist the driver during vehicle
The control system dials the selected operation. The driver is and must always
phone number. remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed
and for safe brake operation.
Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic,
Driving systems and weather conditions make it advisable to
travel at a constant speed.
Introduction
RThe use of the cruise control can be
This section describes the following driving dangerous on winding roads or in heavy
systems of your vehicle: traffic because conditions do not allow safe
RCruise control driving at a constant speed.
RDistronic RThe use of the cruise control can be
dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid
RDistance warning function (only available
changes in tire traction can result in wheel
with Distronic)
spin and loss of control.
RHill-start assist system RDeactivate the cruise control when driving
RRear-axle level control in fog.
RAIRMATIC The “Resume” function should only be
RAll-wheel drive (4MATIC) operated if the driver is fully aware of the
previously set speed and wishes to resume
RParktronic system this particular preset speed.
RRear view camera
The driving safety systems ABS, BAS, EBP and
ESP® are described in the “Safety and
security” section (Y page 63).
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 143
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving systems 143

G Warning! The vehicle speed displayed in the


When the cruise control is braking, the brake speedometer can briefly vary from the speed
pedal is retracted (i.e. depressed setting for the cruise control system.
automatically). The pedals’ range of motion
must not be impeded by any obstacles: Setting current speed
RDo not place any objects in the footwell. X Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
RMake
speed.
sure that the floormats and carpets

Controls in detail
X Briefly lift the cruise control lever in
are securely in place.
direction of arrow : or press in direction
RDo not rest your foot underneath the brake
of arrow ;.
pedal, as it could otherwise be trapped.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
You could otherwise cause an accident and pedal.
injure yourself and/or others.
i On uphill grades, the cruise control may
not be able to maintain the set speed. Once
the grade eases, the set speed will be
resumed.
On downhill grades, the cruise control
maintains the set speed by braking with the
vehicle’s brake system. In addition, on
longer downhill grades the automatic
transmission will downshift automatically.

Canceling cruise control


: Setting current or higher speed X Depress the brake pedal.
; Setting current or lower speed or
= Canceling the cruise control X Briefly push the cruise control lever in
? Activating the cruise control or resuming direction of arrow =.
to last set speed The last set speed is stored for later use.
The last stored speed is deleted from memory
Activating cruise control when the engine is turned off.
You can activate the cruise control at a The cruise control switches off automatically
vehicle speed above 20 mph (30 km/h). when you depress the brake pedal or you
engage the parking brake.
You cannot activate the cruise control
The cruise control switches off automatically
Rwhen you brake and an acoustic warning will sound when
Rwhen you have engaged the parking brake Rthe vehicle speed falls below 20 mph
Rwhen the automatic transmission is in park (30 km/h)
position P, reverse gear R, or neutral Rthe ESP® is in operation
position N
Rthe ESP® is switched off with the ESP®
Rthe ESP® is switched off or has switched off
switch
due to a malfunction

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 144
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

144 Driving systems

Rthe ESP® has switched off due to a X Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control
malfunction lever up to the resistance point in direction
Ryou shift the automatic transmission into of arrow :.
neutral position N while driving X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise
control lever down to the resistance point
Observe additional messages in the
in direction of arrow ;.
multifunction display that may appear.
X Release the cruise control lever.
Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
Controls in detail

deactivate the cruise control. After a brief


accelerate or decelerate.
acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise
control will resume the last set speed. Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada:
10 km/h) increments
Changing the set speed
i The set speed value is increased or
G Warning! decreased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment increments each time you lift or press the
until the vehicle has made the necessary cruise control lever up or down past the
adjustments. resistance point.
Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to X Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control
a value that the prevailing road conditions and lever up past the resistance point in
legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden direction of arrow :.
and unexpected acceleration or deceleration
X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise
of the vehicle could cause an accident and/
or serious injury to you and others. control lever down past the resistance
point in direction of arrow ;.
You can increase or decrease the set speed X Release the cruise control lever.
in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments or in The new speed is set and the vehicle will
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments. accelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind that
When you use the cruise control lever to it may take a brief moment until the vehicle
decelerate, the brake system will brake the has reached the set speed.
vehicle automatically if the engine’s braking
power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently. Setting stored speed (Resume
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: function)
1 km/h) increments G Warning!
i The set speed value is increased or The set speed stored in memory should only
decreased in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) be set again if prevailing road conditions and
increments each time you lift or press the legal speed limits permit. Possible
cruise control lever up or down to the acceleration or deceleration differences
resistance point. arising from returning to the preset speed
could cause an accident and/or serious injury
to you and others.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 145
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving systems 145

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever in You could otherwise cause an accident and
direction of arrow ?. injure yourself and/or others.
If no speed is stored, the current speed is
set and stored. G Warning!
X Remove your foot from the accelerator The Distronic is a convenience system. Its
pedal. speed adjustment reduction capability is
The last stored speed is deleted from memory intended to make cruise control more
when the engine is turned off. effective and usable when traffic speeds vary.

Controls in detail
It is not however, intended to, nor does it,
replace the need for extreme care.
Distronic The responsibility for the vehicle’s speed,
distance to the preceding vehicle and, most
Safety notes importantly, brake operation to ensure a safe
When activated, the Distronic adaptive cruise stopping distance, always remains with the
control increases the driving convenience driver.
afforded by the cruise control while traveling The Distronic cannot take street and traffic
on expressways and other major roadways. conditions into account. Complex driving
RIf the Distronic distance sensor detects a situations are not always fully recognized by
slower moving vehicle directly ahead, your the Distronic. This could result in wrong or
vehicle speed will be reduced so that you missing distance warnings.
follow that vehicle at your preset following
distance. G Warning!
The Distronic adaptive cruise control is not a
RIf there is no vehicle directly ahead of you, substitute for active driving involvement. It
the Distronic will function in the same way does not react to pedestrians or on stationary
as standard cruise control (Y page 142). objects, nor does it recognize or predict the
G Warning! lane curvature or the movement of preceding
vehicles.
The Distronic requires familiarity with its
operational characteristics. We strongly The Distronic can only apply 20% of the
recommend that you review the following maximum braking power of the vehicle.
information carefully before operating the It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
system. be attentive to the road, weather and traffic
conditions. Additionally, the driver must
G Warning! provide the steering, braking and other driving
When the Distronic is braking, the brake pedal inputs necessary to remain in control of the
is retracted (i.e. depressed automatically). vehicle.
The pedals’ range of motion must not be High-frequency sources such as toll stations,
impeded by any obstacles: speed measuring systems etc. can cause the
RDo not place any objects in the footwell. Distronic system to malfunction.
RMake sure that the floormats and carpets G Warning!
are securely in place. The Distronic cannot take road and traffic
RDo not rest your foot underneath the brake conditions into account. Only use the
pedal, as it could otherwise be trapped. Distronic if the road, weather and traffic
conditions make it advisable to travel at a
constant speed.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 146
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

146 Driving systems

G Warning! Distronic will also not respond to oncoming


Use of the Distronic can be dangerous on vehicles.
slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction Switch off the Distronic:
can result in wheel spin and loss of control. Rwhen changing from the left to the right
The Distronic does not function in adverse lane if vehicles are moving more slowly in
sight and distance conditions. Do not use the the left lane
Distronic during conditions of fog, heavy rain,
Rwhen entering a turn lane or highway off
snow or sleet.
Controls in detail

ramp
G Warning! Rin complex driving situations, such as in
The Distronic cannot take weather conditions highway construction zones
into account. Switch off the Distronic or do In these situations, the Distronic will continue
not switch it on if: to maintain the set speed unless deactivated.
Rroads are slippery or covered with snow or The Distronic is designed and intended only
ice. The wheels could lose traction while to maintain a set speed and keep a set
braking or accelerating, and the vehicle distance from moving objects in front of it.
could skid.
Rthe Distronic system sensor cover is dirty i This device has been approved by the FCC
or visibility is diminished due to snow, rain as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar
or fog, for example. The distance control sensor is intended for use in an automotive
system functionality could be impaired. radar system only. Removal, tampering, or
altering of the device will void any
Always pay attention to surrounding traffic
warranties, and is not permitted by the
conditions even while the Distronic is
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
switched on. Otherwise, you may not be able
any non-approved way.
to recognize dangerous situations until it is
too late. This could cause an accident in which Any unauthorized modification to this
you and/or others could be injured. device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
G Warning!
The “Resume” function should only be Distronic displays in the speedometer
operated if the driver is fully aware of the
previously set speed and wishes to resume
this particular preset speed.

G Warning!
Close attention to road and traffic conditions
is imperative at all times, regardless of
whether or not the Distronic is activated.
Use of the Distronic can be dangerous on
winding roads or in heavy traffic because
conditions do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed. When the Distronic is activated, one or two
The Distronic will not react to stationary cruise control speed segments come on
objects in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle around set speed :.
in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). The
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 147
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving systems 147

The vehicle speed displayed on the Immediately brake the vehicle to increase
speedometer can briefly vary from the speed your distance to the preceding vehicle. The
setting on the Distronic system. warning sound is intended as a final caution
in which you should intercede with your own
braking inputs to avoid a potentially
dangerous situation. Do not wait for the
operation of the warning signal to intercede
with your own braking. This will result in

Controls in detail
potentially dangerous emergency braking
which will not always result in an impact being
avoided.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.

G Warning!
When the Distronic detects a vehicle directly The Distronic brakes your vehicle with a
ahead, the cruise control speed maximum deceleration of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2).
segments ; appear in the speedometer. This corresponds to approximately 20% of the
These segments represent the difference maximum deceleration of your vehicle.
between the set speed of your vehicle : and You must also apply the brakes yourself to
the speed of the preceding vehicle =. avoid a collision. The Distronic brakes the
If the Distronic calculates that there is a vehicle in an effort to restore the preset
danger of collision, the distance warning lamp distance or to maintain the set speed. The
· in the instrument cluster comes on and brake pedal is automatically applied as this
an intermittent warning sounds. happens which results in the brake pedal
X Immediately apply the brakes to avoid a
moving
collision. Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times,
Under no circumstances should the driver including the area under the brake pedal.
await the intermittent warning sound Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
before braking. movement which could interfere with the
braking ability of the Distronic system.
The intermittent warning sound ceases and
the distance warning lamp · goes out Do not place your foot under the brake pedal
when the necessary distance to the vehicle – your foot could become caught.
ahead is established again.
Distronic menu in the control system
G Warning!
An intermittent warning sounds and the Use the DISTRONIC menu to display the
distance warning lamp · in the instrument current settings for your Distronic system.
cluster is illuminated if the Distronic system The information shown in the multifunction
calculates that the distance to the vehicle display depends on whether the Distronic
ahead and your vehicle’s current speed system and/or the distance warning function
indicate that the Distronic will not be capable are activated or deactivated.
of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to maintain i To activate or deactivate the Distronic
the preset following distance, which creates system, see (Y page 148) or see
a danger of a collision. (Y page 150).
To activate or deactivate the Distance
warning function, see (Y page 138).

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 148
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

148 Driving systems

X Press button V or U repeatedly until


one of the following two displays appears
in the multifunction display.

Distronic deactivated
When the Distronic is deactivated, you will
see the standard Distronic display in the
Controls in detail

multifunction display.

: Setting current or higher speed


; Setting current or lower speed
= Deactivating the Distronic
? Activating the Distronic or resuming to
the last set speed
: Preceding vehicle, if detected
; Actual distance to the preceding vehicle Activating Distronic
= Preset distance threshold to the
You can activate the Distronic when the
preceding vehicle
vehicle speed is between 20 mph (30 km/h)
? Your vehicle and 110 mph (180 km/h).
When the Distronic is activated, one or two
Distronic activated cruise control speed segments around the set
When the Distronic is activated :, you will speed in the speedometer dial are
see the set speed ; in the multifunction illuminated. The multifunction display will
display for approximately 5 seconds. The show a message such as
following display appears in the multifunction DISTRONIC 55 MPH
display. (Canada: DISTRONIC 90 km/h).
After approximately 5 seconds the currently
set speed appears in the status indicator of
the multifunction display:
RUSA only: e.g. DTR 55 Miles
RCanada only: e.g. DTR 90 km/h
If the Distronic is not activated after the
cruise control lever is pulled in direction of
After approximately 5 seconds the currently
arrow ? (Y page 148), you will see the
set speed ; appears in the status indicator
of the multifunction display: message DISTRONIC Off in the
multifunction display.
DTR XXX Miles
In the following cases you cannot activate the
Cruise control lever Distronic:
Rup to 2 minutes after starting the engine
The Distronic system is operated by means of
the cruise control lever. Rwhen you brake
Rwhen you have engaged the parking brake
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 149
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving systems 149

Rwhen the automatic transmission is in park When you use the cruise control lever to
position P, reverse gear R, or neutral decelerate, the brake system will brake the
position N vehicle automatically if the engine’s braking
power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.
Rwhen the ESP® is switched off or has
switched off due to a malfunction Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada:
The vehicle speed displayed on the 1 km/h) increments
speedometer can briefly vary from the speed i The set speed value is increased or

Controls in detail
setting on the Distronic system. decreased in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
increments each time you lift or press the
Setting the current speed cruise control lever up or down to the
X Accelerate or decelerate to the desired resistance point.
speed. X Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control
X Briefly lift the cruise control lever in lever up to the resistance point in direction
direction of arrow : or depress in of arrow : (Y page 148).
direction of arrow ; (Y page 148). X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise
X Remove your foot from the accelerator control lever down to the resistance point
pedal. in direction of arrow ; (Y page 148).
X Release the cruise control lever.
i If you do not take your foot off of the
accelerator pedal and continue to The new speed is set and the vehicle will
accelerate past the set speed, the following accelerate or decelerate.
message will appear in the multifunction
Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada:
display:
10 km/h) increments
DISTRONIC Override
The distance to a slower moving vehicle in i The set speed value is increased or
front of you will not be set. Your vehicle decreased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
speed will then be determined only by the increments each time you lift or press the
accelerator pedal position. cruise control lever up or down past the
resistance point.
Changing the set speed X Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control
lever up past the resistance point in
G Warning!
direction of arrow : (Y page 148).
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise
until the vehicle has made the necessary
adjustments.
control lever down past the resistance
point in direction of arrow ;
Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to
(Y page 148).
a value that the prevailing road conditions and
X Release the cruise control lever.
legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden
and unexpected acceleration or deceleration The new speed is set and the vehicle will
of the vehicle could cause an accident and/ accelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind that
or serious injury to you and others. it may take a brief moment until the vehicle
has reached the set speed.
You can increase or decrease the set speed
in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments or in
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 150
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

150 Driving systems

Setting stored speed (Resume function) Rthe ESP® has switched off due to a
malfunction
G Warning!
Ryou shift the automatic transmission into
The set speed stored in memory should only
be set again if prevailing road conditions and
neutral position N while driving
legal speed limits permit. Possible The cruise control speed segments in the
acceleration or deceleration differences speedometer dial goes out and an acoustic
arising from returning to the preset speed warning will sound. Observe additional
Controls in detail

could cause an accident and/or serious injury messages in the multifunction display that
to you and others. may appear.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever in G Warning!


direction of arrow ? (Y page 148). Distronic switches off and releases the brakes
If no speed is stored, the current speed is when the vehicle decelerates below the
set and stored. minimum speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) by
operation of the system. At that time the
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
driver must apply the brakes in order to
pedal.
reduce vehicle speed further or bring it to a
stop.
Deactivating Distronic
Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
X Depress the brake pedal. deactivate the Distronic. After a brief
or acceleration (e.g. for passing), the Distronic
X Briefly push the cruise control lever in will resume the last set speed.
direction of arrow = (Y page 148).
The cruise control speed segments in the Setting the following distance in
speedometer dial will go out and the Distronic
following message appears briefly in the
You can set the specified following distance
multifunction display: DISTRONIC Off
for Distronic by varying the time setting
The last set speed is stored for later use. between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using this time
The last stored speed is deleted from memory setting and the current speed of your vehicle,
when the engine is turned off. Distronic calculates and sets the required
The Distronic switches off automatically following distance to the preceding vehicle.
when you depress the brake pedal or you The set distance will be shown in the
engage the parking brake. In this case, the multifunction display.
cruise control speed segments in the
speedometer dial will go out. G Warning!
The Distronic also switches off automatically It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to
when select the appropriate setting given road
conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving
Rthe vehicle speed falls below 20 mph style and applicable laws and driving
(30 km/h) recommendations for safe following distance.
Rthe ESP® is in operation
Rthe ESP® is switched off with the ESP®
switch
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 151
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving systems 151

The Distronic regulates only the distance


between your vehicle and those directly
ahead of it, but does not register stationary
objects in the road, e.g.:
Ra stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
Ra disabled vehicle
Ran oncoming vehicle

Controls in detail
The driver must always be alert, observe all
traffic and intercede as required by means of
steering or braking the vehicle.
X Increasing distance: Turn distance
setting switch : in direction of arrow =. G Warning!
Increasing the distance setting tells The Distronic should not be used in snowy or
Distronic to maintain a greater following icy road conditions.
distance to the preceding vehicle.
The most likely cause for a malfunctioning
X Decreasing distance: Turn distance system is a dirty Distronic system sensor
setting switch : in direction of arrow ;. cover (located in the hood grille), especially
Decreasing the distance setting tells at times of snow and ice or heavy rain.
Distronic to maintain a shorter following In such a case, the Distronic will switch off,
distance to the preceding vehicle. and the message DISTRONIC Currently
Unavailable – See Operator’s Manual
Driving with Distronic appears in the multifunction display.
This section describes a number of driving For cleaning and care of the Distronic system
situations where special precaution is sensor cover, see (Y page 265).
required on the part of the driver. Be prepared i If the message DISTRONIC Available
to brake in such situations. Braking will Again appears during driving, the dirt (e.g.
deactivate the Distronic system. slush) has dissolved; the Distronic works
G Warning! again, if you reactivate it (Y page 148).
The Distronic works to maintain the speed Turns and bends
selected by the driver unless a moving
obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
same travel direction is detected (e.g.
following another vehicle ahead of you at your
set distance).
This means that:
RYour vehicle can pass another vehicle after
you have changed lanes.
RWhile in a sharp turn or if the preceding
vehicle is in a sharp turn, the Distronic
could lose sight of the preceding vehicle.
In turns or bends, the Distronic may not
Your vehicle could then accelerate to the
detect a moving vehicle in front, or it may
previously selected speed.
detect one too soon. This may cause your
vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 152
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

152 Driving systems

Offset driving have not yet been detected by the Distronic.


There will be insufficient distance to the
preceding vehicles.

Distance warning function


This function warns you at a vehicle speed of
above approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) in
the following cases:
Controls in detail

RAt the current speed, the distance between


your vehicle and the preceding vehicle is
too low for several seconds. The distance
A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset from warning lamp · in the instrument
your direct line of travel may not be detected cluster comes on.
by the Distronic. There will be insufficient RYou are gaining on a preceding vehicle
distance to the preceding vehicle. rapidly. An intermittent warning sounds
and the distance warning lamp · in the
Lane changing
instrument cluster comes on.
If these warnings are issued, you must apply
the brakes to maintain a safe distance and
avoid a collision with the preceding vehicle.
When depressing the brake pedal, the
warning sound ceases. The warning sound
will also cease when the distance to the
preceding vehicle is sufficient again without
applying the brakes. In this case, the distance
warning lamp · will also go out.
G Warning!
The Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle
If the distance warning lamp · in the
changing lanes. There will be insufficient
instrument cluster comes on while driving
distance to the lane-changing vehicle.
and/or an intermittent warning sounds,
Narrow vehicles immediate attention on the part of the driver
is required. As required by the traffic
situation, apply the brakes and navigate
around a possible obstacle. However, do not
drive by relying on the distance warning
function, as this will result in an emergency
braking application. This will not always
enable you to avoid a collision, especially
when traveling on varying road surface
conditions and with varying driver reaction.
Complex driving situations are not always
fully recognized by the distance warning
Because of their narrow profile, the vehicles function. This could result in wrong or missing
traveling near the outer edges of the lane distance warnings.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 153
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving systems 153

X Activating/deactivating: Activate or vehicle level at the rear axle constant,


deactivate the distance warning function in independent of the load.
the control system (Y page 138). i Observe the information on towing a
When activated, the distance warning
trailer, see “Trailer towing” (Y page 256).
function indicator Ä appears in the
multifunction display.
AIRMATIC

Controls in detail
Hill-start assist system The AIRMATIC lets you select the chassis and
suspension setup. The chassis and
G Warning! suspension setup adjusts the damping
The hill-start assist system is not designed to behavior and the ride height for your vehicle.
function as a parking brake. It does not The AIRMATIC consists of two components.
prevent the vehicle from moving when parked The Adaptive Damping System (ADS)
on an incline. (Y page 153) and the vehicle level control
Always engage the parking brake in addition (Y page 154).
to shifting the automatic transmission into
park position P.
Adaptive Damping System (ADS)
On uphill grades, the hill-start assist system
maintains the pressure in the brake system The Adaptive Damping System (ADS) is
for approximately 1 second after you have controlled electronically and operates
released the brake pedal. Therefore, you can continuously. It adjusts the damping
start off smoothly without the vehicle moving characteristics to the current operating and
immediately after releasing the brake pedal. driving conditions. The damping is adjusted
individually for each wheel. Driving safety and
X Depress the brake pedal.
tire comfort are increased.
X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
The fine tuning of the damping is dependent
position D or reverse gear R. on:
X Release the brake pedal.
Ryour driving style
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
Rroad surface conditions
The hill-start assist system is inactive
Ryour personal settings
Rwhen starting off on a level road or downhill
grades
Rwith the automatic transmission in neutral
position N
Rwith the parking brake engaged
Rif the ESP® has switched off due to a
malfunction

Rear-axle level control


The rear-axle level control adjusts the vehicle The following settings are available:
level for the rear axle. The rear-axle level
RAUTO (for normal driving situations)
control is beneficial because it keeps the

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 154
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

154 Driving systems

Indicator lamps ; and = are off. is opened and will continue after the door is
RSPORT (for sporty driving) closed again.
Indicator lamp ; comes on.
! Keep in mind that on rough or uneven
RCOMF (for comfort driving)
roads, adjusting the vehicle to a lower level
Indicator lamp = comes on. may cause the vehicle underbody to come
X Start the engine. in contact with the road and result in
X Press ADS switch : repeatedly until the damage to the vehicle underbody. Always
Controls in detail

desired suspension tuning is reached. make sure the vehicle has sufficient ground
clearance before adjusting it to a lower
The setting remains stored when you turn off
level.
the engine.
! Before jacking up the vehicle with
equipment that lifts one or more of the
Vehicle level control wheels completely off of the ground,
Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride remove the SmartKey from the starter
height. switch.
The all-around vehicle level control provides
i The activation threshold is defined by the
best possible suspension and constant
ADS setting (Y page 153).
ground clearance. The vehicle lowers at high
speed automatically in order to increase
driving safety and to reduce fuel
consumption.
Changes to the vehicle level should be made
while the vehicle is moving. The vehicle will
then reach the set level as fast as possible.
When you park the vehicle and the ambient
temperature changes, the vehicle level may
change visibly. When the temperature drops,
the vehicle lowers. When the temperature
rises, the vehicle raises.
The vehicle begins adjusting to the set vehicle Basic settings
level as soon as the doors or tailgate are
unlocked or opened or closed with the vehicle The following vehicle chassis ride heights can
unlocked. be selected using vehicle level control
For major changes in vehicle level, the engine switch : in the center console:
must be running. Level Driving situation
G Warning! Raised level For driving on rough roads.
Make sure no one is near the wheel housing Indicator lamp ; is on.
or under the vehicle when you lower the
vehicle while it is standing still. Limbs could Highway For driving on paved roads
become wedged into or under the vehicle. level in fair or better condition.
For safety reasons, the vehicle can only be Indicator lamp ; is off.
lowered with all doors and the tailgate closed.
Lowering is interrupted if a door or the tailgate
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 155
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving systems 155

i The third available level is the highspeed When indicator lamp ; is off:
level that is set automatically. X Press switch :.
The following is the approximate change in Indicator lamp ; flashes. The vehicle
ride height for each of the level settings: adjusts to the raised level.
Level Ride height The following message appears in the
multifunction display while the level is
Raised level +1.97 in (50 mm) being set:

Controls in detail
Highway +/-0 in (0 mm)
level
Highspeed -0.78 in (-20 mm)
level

i The vehicle is lowered to the highspeed


level automatically if the vehicle speed is i The message can be cleared by pressing
above 70 mph (112 km/h) or if the vehicle the V, U, & or * button on
speed stays between 60 mph (96 km/h) the multifunction steering wheel.
and 70 mph (112 km/h) for
approximately 20 seconds. When the raised level is reached, indicator
lamp ; comes on continuously and the
i The highspeed level is not available when following message appears in the
towing a trailer. For more information on multifunction display for approximately
towing a trailer, see “Trailer towing” 5 seconds:
(Y page 256).

i Obey local speed limits. Use prudent


driving speeds appropriate to prevailing
conditions.

Raised level
Only select the raised level if appropriate for The vehicle level is set to highway level
the driving situation encountered. Otherwise automatically when the vehicle speed is
the fuel consumption may increase and/or exceeding 25 mph (40 km/h).
the handling characteristics of the vehicle
may be unfavorable. Highway level
i You can select the raised level at speeds ! Keep in mind that on rough or uneven
up to 25 mph (40 km/h). At higher speeds, roads, adjusting the vehicle to a lower level
the message Á Level Selection may cause the vehicle underbody to come
Not Permitted appears in the in contact with the road and result in
multifunction display. damage to the vehicle underbody. Always
make sure the vehicle has sufficient ground
X Start the engine.
clearance before adjusting it to a lower
level.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 156
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

156 Driving systems

X Close all doors and the tailgate. improves traction in conjunction with the
X Start the engine. ESP® (Y page 65) and the Electronic Traction
System (4-ETS) (Y page 65).
When indicator lamp ; is on:
X Press switch :. G Warning!
Indicator lamp ; flashes. The vehicle If a drive wheel is spinning due to insufficient
traction:
adjusts to the highway level.
RWhile driving off, apply as little throttle as
The following message appears in the
Controls in detail

multifunction display while the level is possible.


being set: RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator
pedal.
RAdapt your speed and driving style to the
prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The 4MATIC cannot prevent accidents
resulting from excessive speed.
i The message can be cleared by pressing
the V, U, & or * button on ! Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing so
the multifunction steering wheel. could damage the transfer case, which is
When the highway level is reached, indicator not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
lamp ; goes out and the following message Warranty. All wheels must be on or off the
ground. Observe instructions for towing the
appears in the multifunction display for
vehicle with all wheels on the ground.
approximately 5 seconds:
! Only conduct operational or performance
tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
tests are necessary, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
otherwise seriously damage the brake
system and/or the transfer case which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
The vehicle level raised from highspeed level Warranty.
to highway level automatically when the
vehicle speed falls below 40 mph (64 km/h). i In winter operation, the maximum
In the raised level, the vehicle level is lowered effectiveness of the 4MATIC is only
to the highway level automatically when the achieved with winter tires (Y page 251) or
vehicle speed is exceeding 25 mph snow chains as required.
(40 km/h).

Parktronic system
All-wheel drive (4MATIC) The Parktronic system is an electronic
In vehicles with all-wheel drive (4MATIC), parking aid with ultrasonic sensors designed
both axles are powered at all times when the to assist the driver during parking maneuvers.
vehicle is being operated. The 4MATIC The Parktronic system indicates the relative
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 157
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving systems 157

distance between the vehicle and an obstacle parking and other critical maneuvers always
visually and audibly. remains with the driver.
The Parktronic system is activated
automatically when G Warning!
Ryou switch on the ignition Make sure no persons or animals are in or
near the area in which you are parking/
and
maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be
Ryou release the parking brake injured.

Controls in detail
and
Rthe automatic transmission is in drive ! Special attention must be paid to objects
position D, reverse gear R, or neutral with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
position N (e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts,
elevated crossbars or road curbs). Such
The Parktronic system deactivates at speeds objects may not be detected by the system
above approximately 11 mph (18 km/h). At and can damage the vehicle.
lower speeds, the Parktronic system
During parking maneuvers, pay special
activates again.
attention to objects located above or below
The Parktronic system also deactivates when the height of the sensors (e.g. street curbs,
you shift the automatic transmission into painted posts, or trailer hitches etc.). The
park position P or engage the parking brake. Parktronic system will not detect such
The Parktronic system monitors the objects at close range and damage to your
surroundings of your vehicle with six sensors vehicle or the object may result.
in the front bumper and four sensors in the
rear bumper. ! Ultrasonic signals from outside sources
(e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or
jackhammers) may impair the operation of
the Parktronic system.

Range of the sensors

To function properly, sensors : must be free


of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean
sensors : regularly. Be careful not to
scratch or damage sensors :, see “Cleaning
the driving systems sensors” (Y page 265).
G Warning!
The Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is
not intended to, nor does it replace, the need
for extreme care. The responsibility during

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 158
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

158
Controls in detail Driving systems

Front area warning indicators


Front sensors
Center approx. 40 in (100 cm)
Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm)

Rear sensors
Center approx. 48 in (120 cm)
Corners approx. 32 in (80 cm)

Minimum distance
Center approx. 8 in (20 cm) Rear area warning indicators
Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm) Each warning indicator is divided into five
yellow and two red distance segments for left
If the Parktronic system detects an obstacle side : and right side ; of the vehicle. The
in this range, all the distance warning Parktronic system is ready to measure when
segments illuminate and you hear a warning the yellow readiness indicators = are
signal. If the obstacle is closer than the illuminated.
minimum distance, the actual distance may The current transmission position determines
no longer be indicated by the Parktronic which warning indicator will be activated.
system.
Current Warning indicator
Warning indicators transmission
position
Visual signals indicate the relative distance
between the sensors and an obstacle. D Front area activated
R or N Front and rear area
activated

As your vehicle approaches an object, one or


more distance segments will illuminate,
depending on the distance. When the seventh
distance segment illuminates, you have
reached the minimum distance.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 159
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving systems 159

RFront area: An intermittent acoustic Trailer towing


warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds
The rear Parktronic sensors will be
will sound as the first red distance segment
deactivated when you have established the
illuminates. A constant acoustic warning
electrical connection between your vehicle
lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound
and the trailer you are about to tow.
for the second red distance segment. The
signal is canceled when the automatic ! The distance between the sensors in the
transmission is shifted into park bumpers and an obstacle is referred to as

Controls in detail
position P or the parking brake is engaged. the minimum range of the Parktronic. A
RRear area: An intermittent acoustic trailer hitch will reduce the distance to an
warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds obstacle. Keep this in mind to avoid any
will sound as the first red distance segment damage.
illuminates. A constant acoustic warning
lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound Parktronic system malfunction
for the second red distance segment. The There is a malfunction in the Parktronic
signal is canceled when the automatic system, if only the red distance segments
transmission is shifted into drive illuminate and an acoustic warning sounds.
position D, or park position P, or the The Parktronic system will switch off
parking brake is engaged. automatically after 20 seconds and indicator
lamp ; in Parktronic switch : comes on.
Switching the Parktronic system on/ X Have the Parktronic system checked at an
off authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
The Parktronic system switches on as possible.
automatically when the ignition is switched If only the red distance segments illuminate
on. and no acoustic warning sounds, the
Parktronic system sensors are dirty (e.g. dirt,
ice, snow and slush). Another cause could be
interference from other radio or ultrasonic
signals (e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or
jackhammers). The Parktronic system will
switch off automatically after 20 seconds and
indicator lamp ; in Parktronic switch :
comes on.
X Switch off the ignition.
X Clean the Parktronic system sensors
(Y page 265).
X Switching off: Press Parktronic X Switch on the ignition.
switch :. or
Indicator lamp ; comes on. X Check the Parktronic system operation at
X Switching on: Press Parktronic switch : another location to rule out interference
again. from outside radio or ultrasonic signals.

Rear view camera


The rear view camera is an optical parking aid.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 160
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

160 Driving systems

The area behind the vehicle appears in the Rthe immediate surroundings are
COMAND system display as a mirror image, illuminated with fluorescent light (the
like in the rear view mirror. display may flicker)
In addition, the rear view camera contains Rthere is a sudden change in temperature,
guidelines to help you with driving in reverse. e.g. if you drive into a heated garage from
G Warning! the cold (lens condensation)
Make sure no persons or animals are in or Rthe camera lens is dirty or covered
Controls in detail

near the area in which you are parking/ Rthe rear of your vehicle is damaged
maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be
In this case, have the position and setting
injured.
of the camera checked by a qualified
G Warning! specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you contact a Mercedes-
The rear view camera is only an aid and may
Benz Center for this purpose.
display obstacles
Rfrom
Do not use the rear view camera in these
a distorted perspective
situations. Otherwise you could injure
Rinaccurately yourself or others and/or damage property
Rmay not display obstacles at all including your vehicle while parking/
maneuvering.
The rear view camera does not relieve you of
the responsibility to be cautious. Take care G Warning!
and pay careful attention. The rear view
Use of rear view camera can be dangerous if
camera may not show objects which are
you are color-blind or have impaired color
Rvery close to the rear bumper vision.
Runder the rear bumper Only use rear view camera if you can see and
Rabove
distinguish all colored guidelines shown by
the tailgate handle
rear view camera on the COMAND system
You are responsible for safety at all times and display.
must continue to pay attention to the
immediate surroundings when parking and
maneuvering. This includes the area behind,
in front of, and beside the vehicle. Otherwise
you could endanger yourself and/or others.

G Warning!
The rear view camera either will not function
or will not function to its full capability if
Rthe tailgate is open

Rit is raining very hard, snowing or foggy


Rit is night or you are parking/maneuvering Camera lens : must be free of dirt, ice,
your vehicle in an area where it is very dark snow, and slush to function properly. Clean
Rthe camera is exposed to a very bright white the camera lens regularly. Being careful not
light to scratch or damage the camera lens, see
“Cleaning the rear view camera lens”
(Y page 266).
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 161
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving systems 161

Switching on/off Red guideline = indicates an approximate


X
distance of 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the
Switching on: Switch on the ignition.
vehicle. Yellow guidelines ; indicate an
X Switch on the COMAND system. approximate distance of 3 ft (1 m) from the
X Shift the automatic transmission to reverse rear of the vehicle. Blue guidelines :
gear R. indicate the approximate width required for
The COMAND system display will show the the vehicle.
area behind the vehicle with guidelines.
i The image from the rear view camera will

Controls in detail
G Warning! no longer be displayed if you select another
Please note that objects which do not touch function on the COMAND system while
the ground may appear to be further away reverse gear R is engaged. To display the
than they actually are, for example: image again, disengage and reengage
Rthe
reverse gear R.
bumper of a vehicle parked behind you
Ra trailer hitch X Switching off: Shift the automatic
Rthe
transmission into park position P, neutral
back of a truck
position N, or drive position D.
In such cases, you should not use the
guidelines to judge the distance. You may
misjudge the distance which increases the
risk of impacting the objects.
Even when the object you approach is directly
on the ground do not approach the object any
closer than the red guideline.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 162
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

162 Overview of climate control system functions and air vents

Overview of climate control system functions and air vents

Your vehicle is equipped with either of the following climate control systems:
Climate control (Y page 164) 3-zone automatic climate control
Controls in detail

USA only (Y page 170)

Canada only (Y page 172)


The climate control combines an automatic The 3-zone automatic climate control
heating and ventilation system with a cooling combines an automatic heating and
system. You can adjust the automatic ventilation system with a cooling system.
climate control separately for the driver’s You can adjust the 3-zone automatic climate
and passenger side. control separately for each zone in the
vehicle.

Rear automatic climate Air vents


control (Y page 174)
G Warning!
When operating the climate control, the air
that enters the passenger compartment
through the air vents can be very hot or very
cold (depending on the set temperature). This
may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected
skin in the immediate area of the air vents.
Always keep sufficient distance between
unprotected parts of the body and the air
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution
adjustment to direct the air to air vents in the
The rear automatic climate control allows vehicle interior that are not in the immediate
separate climate settings for the rear area of unprotected skin.
compartment.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 163
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Overview of climate control system functions and air vents 163

For best possible performance of the climate Side air vents


control:
X Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks, and
any other debris.
X Always keep all air vents and grilles in the
passenger compartment free from
obstruction.

Controls in detail
i For draft-free ventilation, move the
adjustable center and side air vents to the
middle position.
Example illustration driver’s side
Center air vents : Left side defroster air vent, fixed
; Left side air vent, adjustable
= Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable left side air vent
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel =
upward or downward.

Rear center console air vents

: Left center air vent, adjustable


; Right center air vent, adjustable
= Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable right center air vent
? Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable left center air vent
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheels =
and ? upward or downward. : Rear climate control panel
; Right rear center air vent, adjustable
= Left rear center air vent, adjustable
When the front climate control panel is
switched on or off, the air supply through the
rear center air vents is also switched on or
off.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 164
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

164 Climate control

B-pillar air vents Air vents below rear quarter windows


Controls in detail

Vehicles with 3-zone automatic climate control Vehicles with 3-zone automatic climate control
(second row) only (second and third row) only
: Side air vent, adjustable : Defrost air vent for rear quarter window,
; Thumbwheel for air volume control fixed
; Air vent, adjustable
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel ; to = Thumbwheel for air volume control
the left or to the right.
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel =
upward or downward.

Climate control
Control panel
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 165
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Climate control 165

Function Recommendation/Notes
: Temperature control, driver’s i Set the temperature to 72‡ (Y page 168)
side (22†).
; Air distribution and air volume i Switches on the automatic (Y page 167)
(automatic mode) mode. The indicator lamp in
button à comes on.

Controls in detail
= Front defroster i Keep this setting selected (Y page 168)
only until the windshield or the
side windows are clear again.
? Increasing air volume (Y page 168)
A Air distribution (directs air (Y page 168)
through the windshield and side
air vents)
B AC cooling on/off i Switches on the air (Y page 167)
conditioning. The indicator
lamp in button Á comes
on.
Residual heat/ventilation i With the engine turned off, it (Y page 170)
is possible to continue to heat
or ventilate the interior.
C Temperature control, passenger i Set the temperature to 72‡ (Y page 168)
side (22†).
D ± Rear climate control on/
off or air supply for rear
passenger compartment on/off
(USA only)
^ Rear climate control on/
off or air supply for rear
passenger compartment on/off
(Canada only)
E Air distribution (directs air (Y page 168)
through center and side air
vents)
F Air distribution (directs air (Y page 168)
through the footwells and side
air vents)
G Air volume display
H Decreasing air volume (Y page 168)

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 166
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

166 Climate control

Function Recommendation/Notes
I Rear window defroster (Y page 180)
J Air recirculation i Only use this function for a (Y page 169)
short time, e.g. in a tunnel.
Otherwise, the windows can
fog up due to lack of fresh air.
Controls in detail

K Interior temperature sensor


L Climate control on/off i Switches on the climate (Y page 166)
control system. The indicator
lamp in button ^ goes out.

Notes on climate control impairing visibility and endangering you and


others.
The climate control is operational whenever
the engine is running. You can operate the Keep the air intake grille in front of the
climate control system in either the windshield free of snow and debris.
automatic or manual mode. The system cools
or heats the interior depending on the i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the
selected interior temperature and the current interior before driving off, see “Summer
outside temperature. opening feature” (Y page 108). The climate
control will then adjust the interior
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors
temperature to the set value much faster.
are filtered out before outside air enters the
passenger compartment through the air
distribution system.
Deactivating the climate control
G Warning! system
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
G Warning!
may require replacement of the filter before
its scheduled replacement interval. A clogged When the climate control system is switched
off, the outside air supply and circulation are
filter will reduce the air volume to the interior
also switched off. Only choose this setting for
and the windows could fog up, impairing
a short time. Otherwise the windows could fog
visibility and endangering you and others.
up, impairing visibility and endangering you
Have a clogged filter replaced as soon as
and others.
possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
X Deactivating: Press button ^.
The air conditioning will not engage (no The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated X Reactivating: Press button Ã.
(Y page 167).
i You can also press button ^ on the
G Warning! climate control panel.
Follow the recommended settings for heating
and cooling given on the following pages.
Otherwise the windows could fog up,
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 167
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Climate control 167

If you press button ¦ to reactivate the X Press button Á again.


climate control system, the defrosting The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
mode is activated. The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which
Deactivating the rear climate control are harmful to the ozone layer.
from the front
! If the air conditioning cannot be activated
X Deactivating: Press button ±. again, this indicates that the air
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.

Controls in detail
conditioning is losing refrigerant. The
X Reactivating: Press button ±. compressor has turned off.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. Have the air conditioning checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Air conditioning
Automatic mode
The air conditioning is operational while the
engine is running and cools the interior air to When operating the climate control system in
the temperature set by the operator. In automatic mode, the interior air temperature,
addition, the air conditioning dehumidifies air volume and air distribution are adjusted
the interior air and helps prevent window automatically.
fogging. In automatic mode, cooling with
dehumidification is switched on. This function
G Warning! can be switched off if necessary.
If you switch off the air conditioning, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather G Warning!
conditions are warm. The windows can fog up If you switch off the air conditioning, the
more quickly. Window fogging may impair vehicle will not be cooled when weather
visibility and endanger you and others. conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
more quickly. Window fogging may impair
i Condensation may drip out from visibility and endanger you and others.
underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction. X Set the desired temperature
(Y page 168).
Deactivating X Activating: Press button Ã.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
It is possible to deactivate the air The air volume and air distribution are
conditioning. The interior air will then no adjusted automatically.
longer be cooled or dehumidified.
X Press button Á. i The settings for the passenger side are
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. also used for the rear passenger
compartment.
The cooling function switches off after a
short delay. X Deactivating: Press button I or K.
The indicator lamp in button à goes out.
Activating The automatic operation of air volume
switches off. The selected blower speed is
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the interior air with the air
conditioning.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 168
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

168 Climate control

shown in air volume display G Adjusting air volume


(Y page 164).
X Decreasing/increasing: Press button
or I or K.
X Press air distribution button ¯, P, or The automatic mode is switched off. The
O. selected blower speed is shown in air
The indicator lamp in button à goes out. volume display G (Y page 164).
The automatic operation of air distribution When using the Voice Control System, the
switches off.
Controls in detail

blower speed reduces automatically. When


the Voice Control System is not used
anymore, the blower speed increases to the
Setting the temperature previously selected level.
You can adjust the air temperature on each
side of the passenger compartment. You
should raise or lower the temperature setting Front defroster
in small increments, preferably starting at You can use this setting to defrost the
72‡ (22†). windshield, for example if it is iced up.
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn You can also defog the windshield and the
temperature control : and/or C side windows.
(Y page 164) slightly clockwise or
i Keep this setting selected only until the
counterclockwise.
windshield or the side windows are clear
again.
Adjusting air distribution Activating
The air distribution can be adjusted manually. X Press button ¦.
The symbols on the buttons represent the The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
following functions:
The climate control switches to the
Symbol Function following functions automatically:
Rmost efficient blower speed and heating
¯ Directs air to the windshield and
power, depending on outside
side air vents
temperature
P Directs air through the center Rair flows onto the windshield and the
and side air vents front door windows (side air vents must
O Directs air to the footwells and be open)
side air vents Rthe air conditioning compressor
switches on at outside temperatures
X
above approximately 41‡ (5†) for air-
Press the desired air distribution button
drying
¯, P, or O.
The indicator lamp in button à goes out.
Adjustments
The automatic mode is switched off. Air
distribution is controlled according to the You can adjust the air volume and the
desired button. temperature when the front defroster is
switched on. The air flow will remain on the
windshield and front door windows.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 169
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Climate control 169

X Press button I to decrease or button Air recirculation mode


K to increase air volume to the desired
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
level.
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
The air volume decreases/increases to the from the outside (e. g. before driving through
next lower/higher blower speed and a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of
heating switches to the temperature that outside air and recirculates the air in the
was set before the front defroster was passenger compartment.
switched on.

Controls in detail
The indicator lamp in button ¦ goes out. G Warning!
The indicator lamp in button Á comes Fogged windows impair visibility,
on. endangering you and others. If the windows
or begin to fog on the inside, switching off the
air recirculation mode immediately should
X Turn temperature control : and/or C
clear interior window fogging. If interior
(Y page 164) slightly in any direction. window fogging persists, make sure the air
Heating switches to the temperature that conditioning is activated, or press button
was set before the front defroster was ¦.
switched on.
The indicator lamp in button ¦ goes out. X Activating: Press button d.
The indicator lamp in button Á comes The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
on.
i The air recirculation mode is activated
i The air conditioning compressor remains automatically at high outside
on even if the indicator lamp in button temperatures.
¦ goes out. This helps to prevent the The indicator lamp in button d is not lit
windshield from fogging. when the air recirculation mode is switched
on automatically.
Deactivating A quantity of outside air is added after
X Press button ¦ again. approximately 30 minutes.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. If you have turned off the air conditioning
Defrosting is turned off. or the outside temperature is below 41‡
The previous settings are once again in (5†), the air recirculation mode will not
effect. The air conditioning compressor switch on automatically.
remains switched on. X Deactivating: Press button d.
i To deactivate, you can also press button The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
^ or Ã.

Windshield fogged on the outside


X Switch the windshield wipers on
(Y page 104).
X Press air distribution button P or O.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 170
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

170 3-zone automatic climate control

i The manually selected air recirculation Regardless of the temperature and air
mode is deactivated automatically: volume set on the climate control panel, an
Rafter5 minutes if the outside interior temperature is aimed at by 72‡
temperature is below approximately (22†) and the blower runs on low speed to
41‡ (5†) protect the vehicle battery.
Rafter 5 minutes if the air conditioning and X Activating: Switch off the ignition.
air-drying are turned off X Press button Á.
Controls in detail

Rafter30 minutes if the outside The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
temperature is above approximately X Deactivating: Press button Á again.
41‡ (5†) The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
The residual heat is deactivated automatically
Rwhen the ignition is switched on
Residual heat and ventilation
Rafter approximately 30 minutes
With the engine switched off, it is possible to
Rif the battery voltage drops
continue to heat or ventilate the interior for
up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of Rif the coolant temperature is too low
the residual heat produced by the engine.
i How long the system will provide heating
depends on the coolant temperature and
the battery voltage.

3-zone automatic climate control


Control panels

USA only
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 171
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

3-zone automatic climate control 171

Function Recommendation/Notes
: Temperature control, driver’s i Set the temperature to 72‡ (Y page 176)
side (22†).
; Air distribution and air volume i Switches on the automatic (Y page 176)
(automatic mode) mode. The indicator lamp in
button à comes on.

Controls in detail
= Front defroster i Keep this setting selected (Y page 178)
only until the windshield or the
side windows are clear again.
? Increasing air volume (Y page 178)
A Air distribution (directs air (Y page 177)
through the windshield and side
air vents)
B AC cooling on/off i Switches on the air (Y page 175)
conditioning. The indicator
lamp in button Á comes
on.
Residual heat/ventilation i With the engine turned off, it (Y page 180)
is possible to continue to heat
or ventilate the interior.
C Temperature control, passenger i Set the temperature to 72‡ (Y page 176)
side (22†).
D Operating the rear climate (Y page 175)
control from the front
E Air distribution (directs air (Y page 177)
through center and side air
vents)
F Air distribution (directs air (Y page 177)
through the footwells and side
air vents)
G Air volume display
H Decreasing air volume (Y page 178)
I Rear window defroster (Y page 180)
J Air recirculation i Only use this function for a (Y page 179)
short time, e.g. in a tunnel.
Otherwise, the windows can
fog up due to lack of fresh air.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 172
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

172 3-zone automatic climate control

Function Recommendation/Notes
K Interior temperature sensor
L Climate control on/off i Switches on the climate (Y page 175)
control system. The indicator
lamp in button ^ goes out.
Controls in detail

Canada only

Function Recommendation/Notes
: Temperature control, driver’s i Set the temperature to 72‡ (Y page 176)
side (22†).
; Air distribution and air volume i Switches on the automatic (Y page 176)
(automatic mode) mode. The indicator lamp in
button à comes on.
= Air distribution, driver’s side (Y page 177)
(directs air through the
windshield and side air vents)
? Front defroster i Keep this setting selected (Y page 178)
only until the windshield or the
side windows are clear again.
A Increasing air volume (Y page 178)
B Rear window defroster (Y page 180)
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 173
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

3-zone automatic climate control 173

Function Recommendation/Notes
C Air distribution, passenger side (Y page 177)
(directs air through the
windshield and side air vents)
D Operating the rear climate (Y page 175)
control from the front

Controls in detail
E Temperature control, passenger i Set the temperature to 72‡ (Y page 176)
side (22†).
F Automatic climate control on/ i Switches on the climate (Y page 175)
off control system. The indicator
lamp in button ^ goes out.
G Air distribution, passenger side (Y page 177)
(directs air through the footwells
and side air vents)
H Air distribution, passenger side (Y page 177)
(directs air through center and
side air vents)
I AC cooling on/off i Switches on the air (Y page 175)
conditioning. The indicator
lamp in button Á comes
on.
Residual heat ventilation i With the engine turned off, it (Y page 180)
is possible to continue to heat
or ventilate the interior.
J Display
K Decreasing air volume (Y page 178)
L Air recirculation i Only use this function for a (Y page 179)
short time, e.g. in a tunnel.
Otherwise, the windows can
fog up due to lack of fresh air.
M Air distribution, driver’s side (Y page 177)
(directs air through center and
side air vents)
N Air distribution, driver’s side (Y page 177)
(directs air through the footwells
and side air vents)

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 174
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

174 3-zone automatic climate control

Function Recommendation/Notes
O Interior temperature sensor
P Adopting driver’s side settings (Y page 180)
for all zones

Rear automatic climate control Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors
Controls in detail

are filtered out before outside air enters the


passenger compartment through the air
distribution system.
G Warning!
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
may require replacement of the filter before
its scheduled replacement interval. A clogged
filter will reduce the air volume to the interior
and the windows could fog up, impairing
visibility and endangering you and others.
Have a clogged filter replaced as soon as
: Increasing air volume
possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
; Temperature control Center.
= Air distribution and air volume (automatic
mode) The air conditioning will not engage (no
? Air distribution (directs air through the cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated
side air vents) (Y page 175).
A Air distribution (directs air through the G Warning!
footwells and side air vents) Follow the recommended settings for heating
B Rear automatic climate control on/off and cooling given on the following pages.
C Decreasing air volume Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
Notes on 3-zone automatic climate
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
control
windshield free of snow and debris.
With the help of a sun sensor, the automatic i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the
climate control determines the relation of the
interior before driving off, see “Summer
sun to the vehicle and automatically adjusts
opening feature” (Y page 108). The climate
the inside temperature for every individual
control will then adjust the interior
zone.
temperature to the set value much faster.
The automatic climate control is operational
whenever the engine is running. It cools the
vehicle’s interior according to the angle and
intensity of the sun’s rays, the outside
temperature and the selected temperature.
You can operate the automatic climate
control in either the automatic or manual
mode.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 175
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

3-zone automatic climate control 175

Deactivating the climate control The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
system In display J, you will see the Y symbol
followed by ON and MODE. The MODE display
G Warning! is cleared and the indicator lamp in button
When the climate control system is switched X goes out after approximately
off, the outside air supply and circulation are 3 seconds.
also switched off. Only choose this setting for
The rear climate control switches on.
a short time. Otherwise the windows could fog

Controls in detail
up, impairing visibility and endangering you
and others. Deactivating the rear climate control
from the rear
Deactivating the front climate control X Deactivating: Press button ^.
X Deactivating: Press button ^. The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. X Reactivating: Press button Ã.

Canada only: Display J (Y page 172) is The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
cleared.
X Reactivating: Press button Ã.
Air conditioning
i You can also press button ^ on the The air conditioning is operational while the
climate control panel. engine is running and cools the interior air to
If you press button ¦ to reactivate the the temperature set by the operator. In
climate control system, the defrosting addition, the air conditioning dehumidifies
mode is activated. the interior air and helps prevent window
fogging.
Deactivating the rear climate control
from the front G Warning!
If you switch off the air conditioning, the
USA only vehicle will not be cooled when weather
X Deactivating: Press button ±. conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. more quickly. Window fogging may impair
X Reactivating: Press button ±.
visibility and endanger you and others.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
i Condensation may drip out from
Canada only underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
X Deactivating: Press button X. not an indication of a malfunction.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
In display J (Y page 172), you will see the
Deactivating
Y symbol followed by MODE for It is possible to deactivate the cooling
approximately 3 seconds. function of the climate control system. The
X Within these 3 seconds press button interior air will then no longer be cooled or
^. dehumidified.
In display J, you will see the Y symbol X Press button Á.

followed by OFF. The indicator lamp in the button goes out.


The rear climate control is switched off. The cooling function switches off after a
X Reactivating: Press button X.
short delay.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 176
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

176 3-zone automatic climate control

Activating i The settings for the passenger side are


also used for the rear passenger
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
compartment.
dehumidify the interior air with the air
conditioning. X Deactivating: Press button I or K.

X Press button Á again.


The indicator lamp in button à goes out.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. The automatic air volume is switched off
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant and is controlled according to the desired
setting. The automatic air distribution
Controls in detail

R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which


are harmful to the ozone layer. remains switched on.
or
! If the air conditioning cannot be activated X Press an air distribution button Z11,
again, this indicates that the air
conditioning is losing refrigerant. The M11, \11, P, ¯12, c11 or
compressor has turned off. O.
The indicator lamp in button à goes out.
Have the air conditioning checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The automatic air distribution is switched
off and is controlled according to the
desired position. The automatic air volume
Automatic mode remains switched on.

You can switch the climate control system on Automatic mode with rear climate
and off for each zone of the passenger control panel
compartment as desired.
X Activating: Press button Ã.
When operating the climate control system in
automatic mode, the interior air temperature, The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
air volume and air distribution are adjusted The temperature, air volume and air
automatically. distribution are adjusted automatically.
In automatic mode, cooling with X Deactivating: Press button I or K.

dehumidification is switched on. This function The automatic air volume is switched off
can be switched off if necessary. and is controlled according to the desired
setting. The automatic air distribution
G Warning! remains switched on.
If you switch off the air conditioning, the or
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
X Press button M or P.
conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
The automatic air distribution is switched
more quickly. Window fogging may impair
off and is controlled according to the
visibility and endanger you and others.
desired position. The automatic air volume
X Set the desired temperature remains switched on.
(Y page 176).
X Activating: Press button Ã.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
Setting the temperature
You can set the air temperature for each of
the 3 zones separately.You should raise or
lower the temperature setting in small
11 Canada only
12 USA only
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 177
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

3-zone automatic climate control 177

increments, preferably starting at 72‡ Rear temperature with rear climate


(22†). control panel
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn
temperature control ; (Y page 174)
slightly clockwise or counterclockwise.

Adjusting air distribution

Controls in detail
USA only
The air distribution can be adjusted manually.
The symbols on the buttons represent the
following functions:
Front temperature with front climate
control panel Symbol Function
¯ Directs air to the windshield and
USA only
side air vents
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn
temperature control : and/or C P Directs air through the center
(Y page 170) slightly clockwise or and side air vents
counterclockwise. O Directs air to the footwells and
side air vents
Canada only
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn
X Press the desired air distribution button
temperature control : and/or E
(Y page 172) slightly clockwise or ¯, P, or O.
counterclockwise. The automatic mode is switched off. The
indicator lamp in the desired button comes
on.
Rear temperature with front climate
control panel
Canada only
USA only
The air distribution can be adjusted
X Press button ±. separately on each side of the passenger
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn compartment.
temperature control C (Y page 170) The symbols on the buttons represent the
slightly clockwise or counterclockwise. following functions:

Canada only
X Press button X.
In display J (Y page 172) you will see the
Y symbol.
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn
temperature control E (Y page 172)
slightly clockwise or counterclockwise.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 178
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

178 3-zone automatic climate control

Symbol Symbol Function When using the Voice Control System, the
blower speed reduces automatically. When
Driver’s Passenger
the Voice Control System is not used
side side
anymore, the blower speed increases to the
Z M Directs air to previously selected level.
the windshield
and side air
vents Front defroster
Controls in detail

\ P Directs air You can use this setting to defrost the


through the windshield, for example if it is iced up.
center, side You can also defog the windshield and the
and rear side windows.
passenger i Keep this setting selected only until the
compartment windshield or the side windows are clear
air vents again.
c O Directs air to
the footwells Activating
and side air X Press button ¦.
vents
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The climate control switches to the
X Press the desired air distribution button following functions automatically:
Z, \, or c for the driver’s side, Rmost efficient blower speed and heating
or M, P, or O for the passenger power, depending on outside
side. temperature
The automatic mode is switched off. The Rair flows onto the windshield and the
indicator lamp in the desired button comes
front door windows (side air vents must
on.
be open)
Rthe air conditioning compressor
Adjusting air volume switches on at outside temperatures
above approximately 41‡ (5†) for air-
USA only drying
X Decrease/increase: Press button I or
K. Adjustments
The automatic mode is switched off. The You can adjust the air volume and the
selected blower speed is shown in air temperature when the front defroster is
volume display G (Y page 170). switched on. The air flow will remain on the
windshield and front door windows.
Canada only
X Press button I to decrease or button
X Decrease/increase: Press button I or K to increase air volume to the desired
K. level.
The automatic mode is switched off. The
The air volume decreases/increases to the
selected blower speed appears in display
next lower/higher blower speed and
J (Y page 172).
heating switches to the temperature that
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 179
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

3-zone automatic climate control 179

was set before the front defroster was X Press buttons O/c13 and P/
switched on. \13.
The indicator lamp in button ¦ goes out.
The indicator lamp in button Á comes
on. Air recirculation mode
or Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
X Turn temperature control : and/or C unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
(USA only) (Y page 170) or : and/or E

Controls in detail
from the outside (e. g. before driving through
(Canada only) (Y page 172) slightly in any a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of
direction. outside air and recirculates the air in the
Heating switches to the temperature that passenger compartment.
was set before the front defroster was
G Warning!
switched on.
Fogged windows impair visibility,
The indicator lamp in button ¦ goes out.
endangering you and others. If the windows
The indicator lamp in button Á comes begin to fog on the inside, switching off the
on. air recirculation mode immediately should
i The air conditioning compressor remains clear interior window fogging. If interior
on even if the indicator lamp in button window fogging persists, make sure the air
¦ goes out. This helps to prevent the conditioning is activated, or press button
windshield from fogging. ¦.

X Activating: Press button d.


Deactivating
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
X Press button ¦ once more.
i The air recirculation mode is activated
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
automatically at high outside
Defrosting is turned off.
temperatures.
The previous settings are once again in
The indicator lamp in button d is not lit
effect. The air conditioning compressor
when the air recirculation mode is switched
remains switched on.
on automatically.
i To deactivate, you can also press button A quantity of outside air is added after
^ or Ã. approximately 30 minutes.
If you have turned off the air conditioning
Windshield fogged on the outside or the outside temperature is below 41‡
X
(5†), the air recirculation mode will not
Switch the windshield wipers on
switch on automatically.
(Y page 104).
X Press button Ã. X Deactivating: Press button d.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
Air volume and air distribution are
controlled separately for each zone.
If the automatic air volume and air
distribution are switched off:

13 Canada only

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 180
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

180 Rear window defroster

i The manually selected air recirculation Using driver-side settings for all
mode is deactivated automatically: temperature zones
Rafter5 minutes if the outside This feature is only available in Canada
temperature is below approximately vehicles.
41‡ (5†) You can use the settings of the driver’s side,
Rafter 5 minutes if the air conditioning and such as temperature, air volume and air
air-drying are turned off distribution, for all temperature zones. These
Controls in detail

Rafter30 minutes if the outside settings only need to be made once and the
temperature is above approximately climate control system will automatically
41‡ (5†) regulate the settings for all temperature
zones quickly and comfortably.
At outside temperatures above 79‡ (26†) X Activating: Adjust the air temperature, air
the system will not automatically switch back volume and air distribution.
to outside air. A quantity of outside air is
X Press button ¸.
added after approximately 30 minutes.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The driver-side settings are used for all
Residual heat and ventilation temperature zones.
X Deactivating: Press button ¸ again.
With the engine switched off, it is possible to
continue to heat or ventilate the interior for The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of
the residual heat produced by the engine. i If you manually set the temperature, air
volume or air distribution for the passenger
i How long the system will provide heating side or the rear passenger compartment
depends on the coolant temperature and when the MONO setting is active, the
the battery voltage. MONO setting will be switched off.
Regardless of the temperature and air
volume set on the climate control panel, an
interior temperature is aimed at by 72‡ Rear window defroster
(22†) and the blower runs on low speed to
protect the vehicle battery. G Warning!
X Activating: Switch off the ignition. Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
removed from the rear window before driving.
X Press button Á.
Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
endangering you and others.
X Deactivating: Press button Á again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. The rear window defroster uses a large
The residual heat is deactivated amount of power. To keep the battery drain
automatically: to a minimum, switch off the defroster as
soon as the rear window is clear. The
Rwhen the ignition is switched on defroster is switched off automatically after
Rafter approximately 30 minutes some time of operation depending on the
Rif the battery voltage drops outside temperature.
Rif the coolant temperature is too low
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 181
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Power tilt/sliding sunroof 181

X Switch on the ignition. shatter. This may result in an opening in the


X Switching on: Press button ª on the roof.
respective climate control panel. In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. their seat belts or not wearing them properly
X Switching off: Press button ª again. may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
opening also presents a potential for injury for
The rear window defroster switches off when
occupants wearing their seat belts properly as
the battery voltage is too low. The indicator
entire body parts or portions of them may

Controls in detail
lamp in button ª flashes. Too many
protrude from the passenger compartment.
electrical consumers may be operating
simultaneously.
! To avoid damaging the seals, do not
X Switch off consumers that are currently not
transport any objects with sharp edges
needed if required. which can stick out of the tilt/sliding
sunroof.
Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there
Power tilt/sliding sunroof is snow or ice on the roof, as this could
Opening and closing result in malfunctions.
If you cannot open or close the tilt/sliding
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55. sunroof due to a malfunction contact
G Warning! Roadside Assistance or an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
When opening or closing the tilt/sliding
sunroof, make sure there is no danger of ! Please keep in mind that weather
anyone being harmed by the opening/closing conditions can sometimes change rapidly.
procedure. Make sure to close the tilt/sliding sunroof
The tilt/sliding sunroof is equipped with the when leaving the vehicle. If water enters
express operation and automatic reversal the vehicle interior, vehicle electronics
function. If the movement of the tilt/sliding could be damaged which is not covered by
sunroof is blocked during the closing the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
procedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof will stop
and open slightly. i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding
The tilt/sliding sunroof operates differently sunroof using the SmartKey or the
when the sunroof switch is pressed and held. KEYLESS-GO function, see “Summer
See the “Closing when the tilt/sliding sunroof opening feature” (Y page 108) and
is blocked” section for details. “Convenience closing feature”
The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/ (Y page 108).
sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by
i After switching off the ignition or
releasing the sunroof switch or, if the sunroof
removing the SmartKey from the starter
switch was moved past the resistance point
switch, you can operate the tilt/sliding
and released, by moving the sunroof switch in
sunroof until you open the driver’s or front
any direction.
passenger door. If no door was opened you
G Warning! can operate the tilt/sliding sunroof for up
to 5 minutes.
The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass.
In the event of an accident, the glass may

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 182
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

182 Power tilt/sliding sunroof

i Express opening is not available when the


tilt/sliding sunroof is raised. The tilt/
sliding sunroof must be closed first.

i When the tilt/sliding sunroof is open,


resonance noises may result in addition to
the usual wind noises. They are caused by
minimal pressure changes in the passenger
Controls in detail

compartment. To reduce or eliminate these


noises, change the position of the tilt/
sliding sunroof or open a window slightly.
Sunroof switch
: Raising Raising
; Opening
X Raising manually: Press and hold the
= Closing sunroof switch to the resistance point in
With the sunroof closed or raised, you can direction of arrow :.
slide the sunroof screen forward and back. X Release the sunroof switch when the
desired position is reached.
X Express operation: To raise the tilt/
sliding sunroof completely, press the
sunroof switch past the resistance point in
direction of arrow : and release.
X Stopping during express operation:
Move the sunroof switch in any direction.
i Express raising is not available when the
tilt/sliding sunroof is open. The tilt/sliding
sunroof must be closed first.
Sunroof screen
X Switch on the ignition. Closing
X Closing manually: Pull and hold the
Opening sunroof switch to the resistance point in
direction of arrow =.
X Opening manually: Press and hold the
X Release the sunroof switch when the
sunroof switch to the resistance point in
direction of arrow ;. desired position is reached.
X Express operation: To close the tilt/
X Release the sunroof switch when the
desired position is reached. sliding sunroof completely, pull the sunroof
switch past the resistance point in
X Express operation: To open the tilt/
direction of arrow = and release.
sliding sunroof completely, press the
X Stopping during express operation:
sunroof switch past the resistance point in
direction of arrow ; and release. Move the sunroof switch in any direction.
X Stopping during express operation:
Move the sunroof switch in any direction.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 183
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Power tilt/sliding sunroof 183

Closing when the tilt/sliding sunroof is Synchronizing


blocked
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized
G Warning!
Rafter the battery has been disconnected or
Make sure that nobody can become trapped
discharged
and be seriously or even fatally injured when
closing the tilt/sliding sunroof with greater Rafter a malfunction
force or without automatic reversal function. Rif the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open

Controls in detail
smoothly
If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is
blocked during the closing procedure (e.g. by ! If the tilt/sliding sunroof cannot be closed
ice or pollution), the tilt/sliding sunroof will or synchronized, contact an authorized
stop and open slightly. Mercedes-Benz Center or call Roadside
X Immediately after the tilt/sliding sunroof Assistance.
has stopped and opened because it was X Vehicles with SmartKey: Switch off the
blocked, pull and hold the sunroof switch ignition and remove the SmartKey from the
in direction of arrow = until the tilt/sliding starter switch.
sunroof is fully closed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Switch off the
The tilt/sliding sunroof closes with greater ignition and open the driver’s door. This
force. puts the starter switch in position 0, same
If the tilt/sliding sunroof is blocked again and as with the SmartKey removed from the
opens slightly: starter switch. The driver’s door then can
X
be closed again.
Immediately after the tilt/sliding sunroof
X Remove the fuse for the tilt/sliding sunroof
was blocked and has opened, pull and hold
the sunroof switch in direction of arrow from the fuse box (Y page 340).
= until the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully X Reinsert the fuse in the fuse box.
closed. X Switch on the ignition.
The tilt/sliding sunroof closes without X Press and hold the sunroof switch in
automatic reversal function.
direction of arrow : (Y page 182) until the
G Warning! tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at the
Pulling and holding the sunroof switch to rear.
close the tilt/sliding sunroof immediately X Keep holding the sunroof switch in
after it had been blocked two times will cause direction of arrow : for approximately
the tilt/sliding sunroof to close without any 1 second.
reversal function for as long as you hold the X Check the express operation feature
sunroof switch. (Y page 182).
If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens and closes
completely, the roof is synchronized.
Otherwise repeat the above steps.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 184
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

184 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Panorama roof with power tilt/ Opening and closing the panorama
sliding panel roof with power tilt/sliding panel
Extending and retracting the roller G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
sunblinds
G Warning!
The roller sunblinds only operate with the tilt/ When opening or closing the tilt/sliding panel,
sliding panel closed. The front and rear roller make sure there is no danger of anyone being
sunblind cannot be operated individually. harmed by the opening/closing procedure.
Controls in detail

G Warning! The tilt/sliding panel is equipped with the


When extending the roller sunblinds, make express operation and automatic reversal
sure no one is in danger of being injured by function. If the movement of the tilt/sliding
the extending procedure. The extending of the panel is blocked during the closing procedure,
roller sunblinds can be immediately halted by the tilt/sliding panel will stop and open
releasing the switch. slightly.
The tilt/sliding panel operates differently
when the roof panel switch is pressed and
held. See the “Closing when the tilt/sliding
panel is blocked” section in this chapter for
details.
The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/
sliding panel can be immediately halted by
releasing the roof panel switch or, if the roof
panel switch was moved past the resistance
point and released, by moving the roof panel
switch in any direction.

Roof panel switch G Warning!


: Retracting The panorama roof with tilt/sliding panel is
; Retracting made out of glass. In the event of an accident,
= Extending the glass may shatter. This may result in an
opening in the roof.
X Switch on the ignition. In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
X Retracting/Extending: Move the roof their seat belts or not wearing them properly
panel switch to the resistance point in the may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
required direction of arrow :, ; or = opening also presents a potential for injury for
until the roller sunblinds have reached their occupants wearing their seat belts properly as
desired position. entire body parts or portions of them may
X Express retracting: Push the roof panel protrude from the passenger compartment.
switch past the resistance point in
direction of arrow ; and release. ! To avoid damaging the seals, do not
The roller sunblinds retract completely. transport any objects with sharp edges
X Stopping during express retracting:
which can stick out of the tilt/sliding panel.
Move the roof panel switch in any direction. Do not open the tilt/sliding panel if there is
snow or ice on the roof, as this could result
in malfunctions.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 185
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 185

! Please keep in mind that weather i Express opening is not available when the
conditions can sometimes change rapidly. tilt/sliding panel is raised. The tilt/sliding
Make sure to close the tilt/sliding panel panel must be closed first.
when leaving the vehicle. If water enters
the vehicle interior, vehicle electronics i When the tilt/sliding panel is open,
could be damaged which is not covered by resonance noises may result in addition to
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. the usual wind noises. They are caused by
minimal pressure changes in the passenger

Controls in detail
compartment. To reduce or eliminate these
noises, change the position of the tilt/
sliding panel or open a window slightly.

Raising
X Raising manually: Press and hold the roof
panel switch in direction of arrow :.
X Release the roof panel switch when the
desired position is reached.
Roof panel switch
Closing
: Raising
; Opening X Closing manually: Pull and hold the roof
= Closing panel switch in direction of arrow =.
X Release the roof panel switch when the
The tilt/sliding panel only operates with the
desired position is reached.
roller sunblinds retracted.
i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding Closing when the tilt/sliding panel is
panel using the SmartKey, see “Summer blocked
opening feature” (Y page 108) or see G Warning!
“Convenience closing feature” Make sure that nobody can become trapped
(Y page 108). and be seriously or even fatally injured when
X Switch on the ignition. closing the tilt/sliding panel without
automatic reversal function.
Opening If the movement of the tilt/sliding panel is
X Opening manually: Press and hold the blocked during the closing procedure (e.g. by
roof panel switch to the resistance point in ice or pollution), the tilt/sliding panel will stop
direction of arrow ;. and open slightly.
X Release the roof panel switch when the X Immediately after the tilt/sliding panel has
desired position is reached. stopped and opened because it was
X Express operation: To open the tilt/ blocked, pull and hold the roof panel switch
sliding panel completely, press the roof in direction of arrow = until the tilt/sliding
panel switch past the resistance point in panel is fully closed.
direction of arrow ; and release.
X Stopping during express operation:
Move the roof panel switch in any direction.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 186
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

186 Loading and storing

If the tilt/sliding panel is blocked again and starter switch. The driver’s door then can
opens slightly: be closed again.
X Immediately after the tilt/sliding panel was X Remove the respective fuse from the fuse
blocked and has opened, pull and hold the box (Y page 340).
roof panel switch in direction of arrow = X Reinsert the fuse in the fuse box.
until the tilt/sliding panel is fully closed. X Switch on the ignition.
The tilt sliding panel closes without
X Push and hold the roof panel switch in
automatic reversal function.
Controls in detail

direction of arrow = (Y page 185) until the


G Warning! roller sunblinds are fully extended.
Pulling and holding the roof panel switch to X Keep holding the roof panel switch in
close the tilt/sliding panel immediately after direction of arrow = (Y page 185) for
it had been blocked two times will cause the approximately 1 second.
tilt/sliding panel to close without any reversal X Pull and hold the roof panel switch in
function for as long as you hold the roof panel direction of arrow ; (Y page 185) until the
switch. roller sunblinds are fully retracted.
X Keep holding the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow ; (Y page 185) for
Synchronizing approximately 1 second.
The tilt/sliding panel and roller sunblinds X Push and hold the roof panel switch in
must be synchronized direction of arrow = (Y page 185) until the
Rafter the battery has been disconnected or tilt/sliding panel is fully closed.
discharged X Keep holding the roof panel switch in

Rafter
direction of arrow = (Y page 185) for
a malfunction
approximately 1 second.
Rif the tilt/sliding panel does not open X Check the express operation feature of the
smoothly
tilt/sliding panel (Y page 184).
! Do not attempt to open the tilt/sliding If the tilt/sliding panel opens completely,
panel before the tilt/sliding panel is the roof is synchronized. Otherwise repeat
properly synchronized. The tilt/sliding the above steps.
panel could otherwise lock-up in the open
position.
If the tilt/sliding panel cannot be closed or Loading and storing
synchronized, contact an authorized Loading instructions
Mercedes-Benz Center or call Roadside
Assistance. G Warning!
X
Always fasten items being carried as securely
Vehicles with SmartKey: Remove the
as possible. Use cargo tie-down rings and
SmartKey from the starter switch.
fastening materials appropriate for the weight
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Switch off the
and size of the load.
ignition and open the driver’s door. This
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
puts the starter switch in position 0, same
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
as with the SmartKey removed from the
inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 187
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Loading and storing 187

vehicle occupants unless the items are Rpassengers

securely fastened in the vehicle. Rluggage/cargo


To help avoid personal injury during a collision It must never exceed the load limit and the
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) for your
transporting cargo. Do not pile luggage or vehicle. The load limit and the GVWR are
cargo higher than the seat backrests. specified on the placard located on the
The cargo compartment is the preferred place driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 236).
to carry objects. Always use cargo tie-down

Controls in detail
In addition, the load must be distributed so
rings, and if so equipped, always use the cargo that the weight on each axle never exceeds
net when transporting cargo. the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the
Never drive a vehicle with the tailgate open. front and rear axle. The GVWR and GAWR for
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may your vehicle are indicated on the certification
enter vehicle interior resulting in label located on the driver’s door B-pillar
unconsciousness and death. (Y page 236).
For more information, see “Tire and Loading
Load distribution Information” (Y page 237).
The handling characteristics of a fully loaded
vehicle depend greatly on the load
distribution. It is therefore recommended to
load the vehicle according to the illustration
shown. The heaviest items are to be placed
towards the front of the vehicle.
i The cargo compartment is the preferred
place to carry objects. The expanded cargo
volume (Y page 189) should only be used
for items which do not fit in the cargo
compartment alone.
Please pay attention to and comply with the
following instructions when loading the
vehicle and transporting cargo:
RAlways place items being carried against
front or rear seat backrests, and fasten
them as securely as possible.
RThe heaviest portion of the cargo should
always be kept as low as possible against
front or rear seat backrests.
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the weight
of the vehicle including:
Rfuel
Roof rack
Rtools
For information about further roof rack
Rspare wheel equipment, contact an authorized Mercedes-
Rinstalled accessories Benz Center.

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 188
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

188 Loading and storing

G Warning! Parcel nets


Only use the roof rack when the basic carrier
G Warning!
bars have been completely mounted. The left
and right roof rails are only stabilized by Vehicles with Occupant Classification System
means of the basic carrier bars being (OCS)
mounted. Do not place objects with a combined weight
of more than 4.4 lbs (2 kg) into the parcel net
Follow the manufacturer’s installation
on the back of the front passenger seat.
instructions. Otherwise, an improperly
Controls in detail

Otherwise, the OCS may not be able to


attached roof rack system or its load could
properly approximate the occupant weight
become detached from the vehicle.
category.
Do not exceed the maximum roof load of
220 lb (100 kg). G Warning!
Take into consideration that when the roof Parcel nets are intended for storing light-
rack is loaded, the handling characteristics weight items only, such as road maps, mail,
are different from those when operating the etc.
vehicle without the roof rack loaded. Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges, or
Make sure fragile objects may not be transported in the
parcel nets. In an accident, during hard
Ryou can raise the tilt/sliding sunroof (or braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
tilt/sliding panel) at the rear completely thrown around inside the vehicle and cause
Ryou can open the tilt/sliding sunroof (or injury to vehicle occupants.
tilt/sliding panel) completely Parcel nets cannot protect transported goods
Ryou can open the tailgate completely in the event of an accident.

Parcel nets are located in the front passenger


footwell and on each of the front seat
backrests.

Cargo tie-down rings


Your vehicle is equipped with eight cargo tie-
down rings.
Always follow loading instructions
(Y page 186).
Carefully secure cargo by applying even load
X Flip trim covers : open. on all the cargo tie-down rings with a rope of
X Only attach the roof rack to the anchorage sufficient strength to hold down the cargo.
points under trim covers :.
X Observe manufacturer’s instructions for
installation.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 189
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Loading and storing 189

Controls in detail
Cargo tie down rings, cargo compartment

Expanding cargo volume


You can fold each seat of the rear passenger
compartment separately to expand the cargo
volume.
You can expand the cargo volume
Rin part, i.e. folding third-row seats
(Y page 190)
Rfully,i.e. folding second-row and third-row
seats (Y page 190)
Cargo tie down rings, second-row footwell
G Warning!
When expanding the cargo volume, always
fully fold the corresponding seats and, if so
equipped, always use the cargo net when
transporting cargo.
Unless you are transporting cargo, the seat
backrests must remain properly locked in the
upright position.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to
Cargo tie-down rings, third-row footwell vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
Always use the cargo tie-down rings.
Hooks
G Warning!
Two hooks are located on the rear
Never drive a vehicle with the tailgate open.
compartment trim panels, one on each side.
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
Use the hooks to secure light-weight items enter vehicle interior resulting in
only. The maximum permissible weight per unconsciousness and death.
hook is 9 lbs (4 kg).

Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 190
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

190 Loading and storing

Expanding cargo volume in part Expanding cargo volume fully


Folding third-row seats G Warning!
X Lower the head restraints of the third-row Folded second-row seats are intended to
seats completely (Y page 88). serve as a cargo volume expansion in
conjunction with folded third-row seats only.
Do not fold the second-row seats and allow
third-row seat occupants to use folded
Controls in detail

second-row seats as a footrest while driving.


Third-row seat occupants must, like all vehicle
occupants, keep both feet on the floor in front
of their seat. Otherwise, occupants could
slide under their seat belt in a collision. If
occupants slide under the seat belt, it would
apply force at the abdomen or neck. That
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. Do
not fold the second-row seats and allow third-
X Place seat belt in seat belt holder :. row seat occupants to use folded second-row
X Pull release handle ; on seat backrest seats as a table while driving. Objects placed
= in direction of arrow. on folded second-row seats may come loose
Seat backrest = is released. during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or an
accident and be thrown around the vehicle
interior. Objects thrown around the vehicle
interior may cause an accident and/or
serious personal injury.

! When folding both seat rows, it is


important that you fold the seats in the
following order:
Rsecond-row middle seat (7-seat vehicles)

Routboard second-row seats


Rthird-row seats
X Move seat backrest = slightly forward. Otherwise, you could damage the seats.
Seat cushion ? is released and folds
forward automatically. Folding second-row middle seat
X Fold seat backrest = to a horizontal ! Close the cup holder in front of the
position. second-row seats before folding the
second-row middle seat. Otherwise you
i Strap A serves to pull up the seat
could damage the cup holder and the
backrest when bringing the third-row seats second-row middle seat.
back to their original position
(Y page 192). X Lower the head restraint of the second-row
middle seat completely (Y page 88).
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 191
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Loading and storing 191

Folding outboard second-row seats


! When the outboard second-row seats are
folded forward, the front seats may not be
moved to the rearmost position. Otherwise
you could damage the front and the
outboard second-row seats.

! Close the cup holder in front of the

Controls